MINI 2021 Cooper Countryman ALL4 Classic Trim Cooper User Manual

OWNER'S MANUAL.

MINI COUNTRYMAN.

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL.

MINI COUNTRYMAN.

Thank you for choosing a MINI.

The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have

on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. It contains

important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of

the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains

information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to

contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI.

Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of

the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

TABLE OF CONTENTS

NOTES

Information.............................................................................................................................. 8

QUICK REFERENCE

Entering..................................................................................................................................16

Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................20

On the road............................................................................................................................ 23

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 32

Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................36

General settings...................................................................................................................42

Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................51

CONTROLS

Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 52

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel.................................................................................73

Transporting children safely............................................................................................85

Driving.................................................................................................................................... 91

Displays................................................................................................................................116

Lights.................................................................................................................................... 132

Safety.....................................................................................................................................138

Driving stability control systems.................................................................................158

Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 163

Climate control...................................................................................................................183

Interior equipment............................................................................................................193

Storage compartments.....................................................................................................201

Cargo area............................................................................................................................204

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving..............................................................................212

Reducing fuel consumption...........................................................................................217

ENTERTAINMENT

General information......................................................................................................... 224

Tone.......................................................................................................................................226

Radio..................................................................................................................................... 228

Audio.....................................................................................................................................236

COMMUNICATION

Telephone............................................................................................................................ 240

MINI Connected................................................................................................................ 244

MOBILITY

Refueling..............................................................................................................................248

Fuel........................................................................................................................................250

Wheels and tires................................................................................................................252

Engine compartment........................................................................................................273

Engine oil.............................................................................................................................276

Coolant..................................................................................................................................280

Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 282

Replacing components.................................................................................................... 284

Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 294

Care........................................................................................................................................303

REFERENCE

Technical data.................................................................................................................... 308

Appendix..............................................................................................................................311

License Texts and Certifications..................................................................................312

Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................320

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Aktiengesellschaft

Munich, Germany

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English ID5 II/20, 03 20 490

Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Information

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation

The fastest way to find information on a

particular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is pro-

vided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial

deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline,

differences may exist between the printed

Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's

Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap-

pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for

the vehicle.

Additional sources of informa-

tion

Service center

A service center will be glad to answer

questions at any time.

Internet

Vehicle information and general informa-

tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-

ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.

MINI Motorer’s Guide app

The Owner's Manual is available in many

countries as an app for iOS or Android in

the respective Store.

MINI Motorer’s Guide Web

Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-

ble information for the selected vehicle. If

possible, only equipment and functions that

are actually installed in the vehicle will be

explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-

played in any current browser.

Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Sym-

bol

Meaning

Precautions that must be

followed in order to avoid the

possibility of injury to yourself

and to others as well as serious

damage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to

help protect the environment.

"..." Control Display texts used to

select individual functions.

Action steps

Action steps to be carried out are presented

as a numbered list. The steps must be car-

ried out in the defined order.

1. First action step.

2. Second action step.

Enumerations

Enumerations without mandatory order or

alternative possibilities are presented as a

list with bullet points.

– First possibility.

Seite 8

NOTES Information

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components

This symbol on a vehicle component

indicates that further information on the

component is available in the Owner's

Manual.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all models

and all standard, country-specific and op-

tional equipment that is offered in the

model series. Therefore, this Owner's

Manual also describes and illustrates fea-

tures and functions that are not available in

a vehicle, for example because of the se-

lected optional features or the country-spe-

cific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions

and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

For any options and equipment not descri-

bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the

Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-

swer any questions that you may have

about the features and options applicable to

your vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic information

The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a

policy of constant development that is con-

ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue

to embody the highest quality and safety

standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-

tures described in this Owner's Manual may

differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial

deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline,

differences may exist between the printed

Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's

Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap-

pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for

the vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

Manufacturer

The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri-

sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft,

BMW AG.

Intended use

Heed the following when using the vehicle:

– Owner's Manual.

– Information on the vehicle. Do not re-

move stickers.

– Technical vehicle data.

– The traffic, speed, and safety laws where

the vehicle is driven.

– Vehicle documents and statutory docu-

ments.

Warranty

Your vehicle is technically configured for

the operating conditions and registration

requirements applying in the country of

first delivery, also known as homologation.

If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ-

ent country it might be necessary to adapt

your vehicle to potentially differing operat-

ing conditions and registration require-

ments. If your vehicle does not comply with

Seite 9

Information NOTES

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

the homologation requirements in a certain

country you may not be able to lodge war-

ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further

information on warranty is available from a

service center.

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, for instance the use

of modern materials and high-performance

electronics, requires suitable maintenance

and repair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends that you entrust corresponding pro-

cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If

you choose to use another service facility,

the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends use of a facility that performs work,

e.g., maintenance and repair, according to

MINI specifications with properly trained

personnel, referred to in the Owner's

Manual as "another qualified service center

or repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for in-

stance maintenance and repair, there is a

risk of subsequent damage and related

safety risks.

Improperly performed work on the vehicle

paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of

components, e.g., the radar sensors, and

thereby result in a safety risk.

Parts and accessories

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends the use of parts and accessory prod-

ucts approved by the manufacturer of the

MINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and advice

on their use and installation are available

from a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested by

the manufacturer of the MINI for their

safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants

genuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not

evaluate whether each individual product

from another manufacturer can be used

with MINI vehicles without presenting a

safety hazard, even if a country-specific of-

ficial approval was issued. The manufac-

turer of your vehicle does not evaluate

whether these products are suitable for

MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California, the law re-

quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the

following warning:

Warning

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-

tomobile components and parts, including

components found in the interior furnish-

ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-

cals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects and repro-

ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and certain products

of component wear contain or emit chemi-

cals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or other re-

productive harm. Battery posts, terminals

and related accessories contain lead and

lead compounds. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands

after handling. Used engine oil contains

chemicals that have caused cancer in labo-

ratory animals. Always protect your skin

by washing thoroughly with soap and wa-

ter. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-

hicle.

Seite 10

NOTES Information

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning

Operating, servicing and maintaining a

passenger vehicle or off-highway motor

vehicle can expose you to chemicals in-

cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to

the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex-

haust, do not idle the engine except as

necessary, service your vehicle in a well-

ventilated area and wear gloves or wash

your hands frequently when servicing

your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-

hicle.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publica-

tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by

the following warranties:

– New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

– Federal Emissions System Defect War-

ranty.

– Federal Emissions Performance War-

ranty.

– California Emission Control System Lim-

ited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties

is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet for US models or in the War-

ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-

dian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted

and designed to meet the particular operat-

ing conditions and homologation require-

ments in your country and continental re-

gion in order to deliver the full driving

pleasure while the vehicle is operated under

those conditions. If you wish to operate

your vehicle in another country or region,

you may be required to adapt your vehicle

to meet different prevailing operating con-

ditions and homologation requirements.

You should also be aware of any applicable

warranty limitations or exclusions for such

country or region. In such case, please con-

tact Customer Relations for further informa-

tion.

Maintenance

Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain

the road safety, operational reliability and

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for maintenance measures:

– MINI Maintenance system.

– Service and Warranty Information Book-

let for US models.

– Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained or is im-

properly maintained, this could result in se-

rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is

not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim-

ited Warranty.

Refer to chapter engine oil change regard-

ing recommended service intervals for oil

changes.

Data memory

General information

Electronic control devices are installed in

the vehicle. Electronic control units process

data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-

generate or exchange with each other. Some

control units are necessary for the vehicle

to function safely or provide assistance dur-

ing driving, for instance driver assistance

systems. Furthermore, control units facili-

tate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged data

can be requested from the manufacturer of

Seite 11

Information NOTES

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam-

ple.

Personal reference

Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi-

cle identification number. Depending on the

country, the vehicle owner can be identified

with the vehicle identification number, li-

cense plate and corresponding authorities.

In addition, there are other options to track

data collected in the vehicle to the driver or

vehicle owner, for instance via utilized

services.

Operating data in the vehicle

Control units process data to operate the ve-

hicle.

For example, this includes:

– Status messages for the vehicle and its

individual components, e.g., wheel rota-

tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration,

transverse acceleration, engaged safety

belt indicator.

– Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,

rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in the

vehicle itself and generally volatile. The

data is not stored beyond the operating pe-

riod.

Electronic components, e.g. control units

and ignition keys, contain components for

storing technical information. Information

about the vehicle condition, component us-

age, maintenance requirements events or

faults can be stored temporarily or perma-

nently.

This information generally records the state

of a component, a module, a system, or the

environment, for instance:

– Operating states of system components,

for instance, fill levels, tire inflation

pressure, battery status.

– Malfunctions and faults in important

system components, for instance lights

and brakes.

– Responses by the vehicle to special sit-

uations such as airbag deployment or

engagement of the driving stability con-

trol systems.

– Information on vehicle-damaging

events.

The data is required to perform the control

unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves

to recognize and correct malfunctions, and

helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize

vehicle functions.

The majority of this data is volatile and is

only processed within the vehicle itself.

Only a small share of the data is stored

event-related in event or fault memories.

When servicing, for instance during repairs,

service processes, warranty cases, and qual-

ity assurance measures, this technical infor-

mation can be read out from the vehicle to-

gether with the vehicle identification

number.

A dealer’s service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop can read

out the information. The socket for OBD On-

board Diagnosis required by law in the ve-

hicle is used to read out the data.

The data is collected, processed, and used

by the relevant organizations in the service

network. The data documents technical con-

ditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi-

fication of the fault, compliance with war-

ranty obligations and quality improvement.

Furthermore, the manufacturer has product

monitoring duties to meet in line with prod-

uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, the

vehicle manufacturer needs technical data

from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle

can also be used to check customer claims

for warranty and guaranty.

Fault and event memories in the vehicle can

be reset when a dealer’s service center or

Seite 12

NOTES Information

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

another qualified service center or repair

shop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer into

the vehicle

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, com-

fort and individual settings can be stored in

the vehicle and modified or reset at any

time.

For example, this includes:

– Settings for the seat and steering wheel

positions.

– Suspension and climate control settings.

If necessary, data can be transferred to the

entertainment and communication system

of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.

This includes the following depending on

the respective equipment:

– Multimedia data such as music, films or

photos for playback in an integrated

multimedia system.

– Address book data for use in conjunc-

tion with an integrated hands-free sys-

tem or an integrated navigation system.

– Entered navigation destinations.

– Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicle

or is found on a device that has been con-

nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,

USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is

stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at

any time.

This data is only transmitted to third parties

upon personal request as part of the use of

online services. The transmission depends

on the selected settings for the use of the

services.

Incorporation of mobile devices

Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo-

bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-

stance smartphones, can be controlled via

the vehicle control elements.

The sound and picture from the mobile de-

vice can be played back and displayed

through the multimedia system. Certain in-

formation is transferred to the mobile de-

vice at the same time. Depending on the

type of incorporation, this includes, for in-

stance position data and other general vehi-

cle information. This optimizes the way in

which selected apps, for instance navigation

or music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between the

mobile device and the vehicle, such as ac-

tive access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further is

determined by the provider of the particular

app being used. The extent of the possible

settings depends on the respective app and

the operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General information

If the vehicle has a wireless network con-

nection, this enables data to be exchanged

between the vehicle and other systems. The

wireless network connection is realized via

an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit

or via personal mobile devices brought into

the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This

wireless network connection enables 'online

functions' to be used. These include online

services and apps supplied by the vehicle

manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehicle

manufacturer

Where online services from the vehicle

manufacturer are concerned, the corre-

sponding functions are described in the ap-

Seite 13

Information NOTES

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

propriate place, for instance the Owner's

Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele-

vant legal information pertaining to data

protection is provided there too. Personal

data may be used to perform online serv-

ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con-

nection, for instance with the IT systems of

the vehicle manufacturer intended for this

purpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of per-

sonal data above and beyond that needed to

provide the services must always be based

on a legal permission, contractual arrange-

ment or consent. It is also possible to acti-

vate or deactivate the data connection as a

whole. That is, with the exception of func-

tions and services required by law such as

Assist systems.

Services from other providers

When using online services from other pro-

viders, these services are the responsibility

of the relevant provider and subject to their

data privacy conditions and terms of use.

The vehicle manufacturer has no influence

on the content exchanged during this proc-

ess. Information on the way in which per-

sonal data is collected and used in relation

to services from third parties, the scope of

such data, and its purpose, can be obtained

from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR

is to record, in certain crash or near crash-

like situations, such as an air bag deploy-

ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that

will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s

systems performed. The EDR is designed to

record data related to vehicle dynamics and

safety systems for a short period of time,

typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-

cord such data as:

– How various systems in your vehicle

were operating.

– Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were fastened.

– How far, if at all, the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

– How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if

a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data

is recorded by the EDR under normal driv-

ing conditions and no personal data, for in-

stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-

tion, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, could combine the EDR data with the

type of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the ve-

hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the spe-

cial equipment, can read the information if

they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Seite 14

NOTES Information

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Vehicle identification number

Engine compartment

The vehicle identification number can be

found in the engine compartment, on the

right-hand side of the vehicle.

Windshield

The vehicle identification number can also

be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles

owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause in-

jury or death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti-

fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box

1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,

Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-

hicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your

dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://

www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-

tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,

Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor vehicle

safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a

safety-related defect to Transport Canada,

Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call

the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You

can also obtain other information about mo-

tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety.

Seite 15

Information NOTES

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Entering

Opening and closing

Buttons on the vehicle key

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

With automatic tailgate operation: open

the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, either only the

driver's door or all vehicle access points are

unlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, press

the button on the vehicle key again to un-

lock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold the button on the ve-

hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are

opened, as long as the button on the vehicle

key is pressed.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central locking

system

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehi-

cle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the ve-

hicle.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find

yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key

and hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Seite 16

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Comfort Access

Concept

The vehicle can be accessed without operat-

ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in

your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-

cle key when it is in close proximity or in

the car's interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door

handle, press the button.

Locking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door

handle, press the button.

Opening and closing the tailgate with

no-touch activation

Concept

The tailgate can be opened and closed with

no-touch activation using the vehicle key

you are carrying.

Performing the foot movement

1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle

at approx. one arm's length away from

the rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di-

rection of travel and immediately pull it

back.

Tailgate

Without automatic tailgate: unlocking

– Unlock the vehicle and then press the

button on the outside of the tailgate.

– Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Seite 17

Entering QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Depending on the setting, the doors may

also be unlocked.

With automatic tailgate: Opening

– Unlock the vehicle and press the button

on the tailgate.

– Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may

also be unlocked.

Without automatic tailgate: Closing

Closing the tailgate manually.

With automatic tailgate: Closing

Press the button on the inside of the tail-

gate.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steering

wheel

1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-

nal

3 Instrument cluster

4 Wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster

The indicator/warning lights can light up in

a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper

functioning and light up temporarily when

the engine is started or the ignition is

switched on.

Seite 18

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driver's door

1 Safety switch

2 Power windows

3 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 Selector lever

2 Controller with buttons

3 Parking brake

Central Information Display (CID)

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) com-

bines the functions of a multitude of

switches. These functions can be operated

via the Controller.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main

menu.

Press twice: open recently used

menus.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Open the Audio menu.

Opens the Phone menu.

Seite 19

Entering QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steering

wheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Electrically adjustable seats

1 Memory function

2 Lumbar support

3 Backrest tilt

4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Adjusting the head restraint

Height

– To raise: push the head restraint up.

– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-

itor

3 Folding in and out

Seite 20

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-

red height and angle to suit your seating

position.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Memory function

Concept

The following settings can be stored and, if

necessary, retrieved using the memory

function:

– Seat position.

– Exterior mirror position.

Storing

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in the

button lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on the

seat while the LED is illuminated. The

LED goes out.

Calling up settings

The stored position is called up automati-

cally.

Press the desired button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a seat adjust-

ment switch or one of the memory buttons

is pressed.

Once underway, adjustment of the seat po-

sition on the driver's side is disabled after a

short while.

Infotainment

Radio

Control elements

1 Changing the waveband

2 Changing the entertainment source

3 Sound output on/off, volume

4 Changing the station/track

5 Programmable memory buttons

Pairing the mobile phone

After the mobile phone is paired once with

the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper-

ated using the Central Information Display

(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo-

ken instructions.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-

played on the Control Display.

Seite 21

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

5. To perform additional steps on the mo-

bile phone, refer to the mobile phone

owner's manual: e.g., search for or con-

nect the Bluetooth device or a new de-

vice.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-

pears on the mobile phone display. Se-

lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

6. Depending on the mobile device, a con-

trol number is displayed or the control

number must be entered.

– Compare the control number dis-

played on the Control Display with

the control number on the display of

the device.

Confirm the control number on the

device and on the Control Display.

– Enter and confirm the same control

number on the device and via the

Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed

in the device list.

The mobile phone is connected and will ap-

pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the phone

Accepting a call

Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen-

tral Information Display (CID) or the button

on the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press the button.

Dialing a number

1. "Communication"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the numbers individually.

4. Select the symbol.

Seite 22

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

On the road

Driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition on/off

– On: press the Start/Stop

button.

Most of the indicator/

warning lights light up for

a varied length of time.

– Off: press the Start/Stop button again.

All indicator lights go out.

– Radio-ready state: when the ignition is

switched off, press the ON/OFF button

on the radio or when the engine is run-

ning, press the Start/Stop button.

Some electronic systems/power con-

sumers remain ready for operation.

Start/stop engine

Steptronic transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Engage selector lever position P or N.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to

neutral.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Steptronic transmission: switching off

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply

the parking brake.

2. Engage selector lever position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: switching off

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press

the Start/Stop button.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Steptronic transmission: switches the en-

gine off automatically while stationary to

save fuel. The engine starts automatically

when the brake pedal is released.

Manual transmission: switches the engine

off automatically while stationary to save

fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is de-

pressed, the engine starts automatically.

Parking brake

Setting

Pull the switch when the vehicle is

stationary.

The LED and indicator light light up.

Releasing

Manual transmission: press the switch

while the brake pedal is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: press the switch

while the brake is pressed or selector lever

position P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Seite 23

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Manual transmission

Shifting

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right in order to

prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or

4th gear.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear-

shift lever dynamically to the left and en-

gage reverse gear with a forward shifting

movement.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positions

Parking position P.

R is reverse.

Neutral N.

Drive mode D.

Engage selector lever position P or R only

when the vehicle is stationary.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after

you select a drive mode or reverse, maintain

pressure on the brake pedal until you are

ready to start.

Selector lever lock

A lock prevents an inadvertent change from

selector lever position P to another selector

lever position and, depending on the trans-

mission version, inadvertent switching to

selector lever position P or R.

To release the lock: with the brake pedal de-

pressed, press the button on the front or

side of the selector lever.

Steptronic transmission, Sport and

manual mode

Sport program:

Press the selector lever to the left from se-

lector lever position D.

Manual mode:

– To shift down: press the selector lever

forward.

– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-

wards.

High beams, headlight flasher, turn

signal, roadside parking light

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low

beams are switched on.

– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-

row 2.

Seite 24

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Turn signal

– On: press the lever past the resistance

point.

– Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist-

ance point.

– Off: press the lever past the resistance

point in the opposite direction.

– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap

the lever up or down.

– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re-

sistance point and hold it there for as

long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Canada: roadside parking light

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

– On: with the ignition switched off, press

the lever either up or down past the re-

sistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

– Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-

ance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Light functions

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief

wipe

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position

is reached.

– Resting position of the wipers: posi-

tion 0.

Seite 25

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– Rain sensor: position 1.

– Normal wiper speed: position 2.

– Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

– Switching off: press the lever down until

it reaches its standard position.

– Brief wipe: press the lever down from

the standard position.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from its

standard position, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into the

standard position.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief

wipe

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

ance point.

Seite 26

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap

once beyond the resistance point.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

– To switch off fast wipe: press down

twice.

– To switch off normal wipe: press down

once.

– Brief wipe: press down once.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Climate control

Air conditioner

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Recirculated-air mode.

Seite 27

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Button Function

Controls the air flow,

manual.

Controls the air distribution

manually.

Windshield defroster.

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO program.

Automatic recirculated-air

control AUC/recirculated-

air mode.

Controls the air flow,

manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs the

windows.

Button Function

Windshield defroster.

Rear window defroster.

Refueling stop

Refueling

Fuel cap

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the

rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap

opens.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-

tached to the fuel filler flap.

Gasoline

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline

should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur

content.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without

metallic additives.

Information on the recommended fuel grade

can be found in the Owner's Manual.

Seite 28

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure values can be

found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure

and correct it as needed:

– At least twice a month.

– Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflation

pressure

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Electronic oil measurement

Requirements

A current measured value is available after

approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a

shorter trip, the status of the last, suffi-

ciently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil level

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Adding engine oil

General information

Switch off the ignition and safely park the

vehicle before engine oil is added.

Adding engine oil

Only add engine oil when the message is

displayed in the instrument cluster.

Observe the quantity to be added in the

message.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Observe recommended engine oil types.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis-

play.

Seite 29

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside Assistance

This service can be reached around the

clock in many countries.

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-

tance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if

needed. Select to dial the telephone

number on a connected mobile phone.

Seite 30

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Seite 31

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 69

2 Exterior mirror operation 82

3 Buttons of the central locking sys-

tem 57

4 Lights

Front fog lights 135

Light switch 132

Lights off

Daytime running lights 134

Parking lights 132

Low beams 132

Seite 32

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Automatic headlight con-

trol 133

Cornering light 134

High-beam Assistant 134

Instrument lighting 136

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Camera-based cruise control

on/off 163

Cruise control on/off 170

Cruise control: to store the

speed

Pausing, continuing cruise

control

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

Camera-based cruise control:

reduce distance

Camera-based cruise control:

increase distance

6 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 98

High beams, head-

light flasher 98

High-beam Assistant 134

Canada: roadside parking

light 133

Onboard Computer 126

7 Instrument cluster 116

8 Steering column stalk, right

Wipers 99

Wiper on Canadian mod-

els 103

Rain sensor 100

Rain sensor on Canadian mod-

els 103

Cleaning windows 101

Rear window wiper in Cana-

dian models 101

Rear window wiper 101

Clean the rear window 101

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Telephone 240

Confirm the selection 126

Selection back 126

Selection next 126

Increase volume

Reduce volume

Seite 33

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

10 Horn, entire surface

11 Adjusting the steering wheel 84

12 Unlocking the hood 274

13 Operate the tailgate 61

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 294

Intelligent Safety 149

2 Control Display 36

3 Radio/Multimedia

4 Glove compartment 201

5 Climate control 183

6 PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 172

Rearview camera 175

Parking assistant 178

Auto Start/Stop func-

tion 94

Start/stop the engine and

switch the ignition on/

off 91

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

158

MINI Driving Modes

switch 160

Seite 34

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

7 Steptronic transmission selector

lever 108

Manual transmission gearshift

lever 107

8 Controller with buttons 39

9 Parking brake 96

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request,

SOS 295

2 Indicator light, front-seat pas-

senger airbag 141

3 Reading lights 136

4 Ambient light 136

5 Panoramic glass sunroof 71

6 Interior lights 136

Seite 35

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) com-

bines the functions of a multitude of

switches. These functions can be operated

via the Controller.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys-

tems and communication devices while

driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-

sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is

a risk of accident. Only use the systems or

devices when the traffic situation allows.

As warranted, stop and use the systems

and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Input and display

Letters and numbers

Depending on the menu, you can switch be-

tween entering upper and lower case let-

ters, numbers and characters:

Symbol Function

Change between capital and

lower-case letters.

Insert blank space.

Use voice activation.

Confirm entry.

Without navigation system

Select the symbol.

Entry comparison

When entering names and addresses, the

choice is narrowed down with every letter

entered and letters may be added automati-

cally.

Entries are continuously compared with

data stored in the vehicle.

Only those letters are offered during entry

for which data is available.

Activating/deactivating the

functions

Several menu items are preceded by a

checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether

the function is activated or deactivated. Se-

lecting the menu item activates or deacti-

vates the function.

Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Seite 36

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Status information

General information

The status field can be found in the upper

area of the Control Display. Status informa-

tion is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being re-

ceived.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular net-

work.

Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Symbol Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Other symbols

Symbol Meaning

Check Control message.

The sound output has been

switched off.

Checking the current vehicle po-

sition.

Control elements

Overview

1 Control Display

2 Controller with buttons

Control Display

General information

To clean the Control Display, follow the care

instructions, refer to page 306.

In the case of very high temperatures on

the Control Display, for instance due to in-

tense solar radiation, the brightness may be

reduced down to complete deactivation.

Once the temperature is reduced, for in-

stance through shade or air conditioning,

the normal functions are restored.

Seite 37

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in the area in the front of the Con-

trol Display can shift and damage the Con-

trol Display. There is a risk of damage to

property. Do not place objects in the area

in front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automatically

The Control Display is switched on automat-

ically when the vehicle is unlocked or as

soon as the Control Display is needed for

operation.

In certain situations, the Control Display is

switched off automatically, for instance if

no operation is performed on the vehicle for

several minutes.

Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off

manually.

1. Press the button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on the

Controller to switch it back on again.

Controller with navigation system

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menus

directly. The Controller can be used to se-

lect menu items and enter the settings.

Operation

– Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

– Press to select a menu item, for example.

– Tilt in four directions to switch between

displays, for example.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main

menu.

Press twice: open recently used

menus.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Seite 38

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Button Function

Opens destination input menu

for navigation.

Opens navigation map.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation

system

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menus

directly. The Controller can be used to se-

lect menu items and enter the settings.

Operation

– Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

– Press to select a menu item, for example.

– Tilt in two directions to switch between

displays, for example.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main

menu.

Press twice: open recently used

menus.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Open the Audio menu.

Opens the Phone menu.

Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menu

Press the button.

Seite 39

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func-

tions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired

menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the Controller.

Adjusting menu contents

The display of menus "Media/Radio",

"Communication" and "MINI Connected" can

be adjusted, for instance to remove the en-

tries of functions that are not used from the

menu.

Via Central Information Display (CID):

1. Select the menu.

2. "Personalize menu"

3. Select desired menu contents to be dis-

played.

Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, for instance

"System settings", a new display appears.

– Move the Controller to the left.

The current display closes and the previ-

ous display is shown.

– Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.

– Move the Controller to the right.

The new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays

can be opened.

Opening recently used menus

The recently used menus can be displayed.

Press the button twice.

Opening the Options menu

Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas, for in-

stance:

– "Media/Radio": control options for the

selected main menu.

– "Save station": if applicable, further con-

trol options for the selected menu.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. Turn the Controller: select letters or

numbers.

2. : confirm entry.

Seite 40

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Deleting

Symbol Function

Press the Controller: delete

letters or number.

Hold the Controller down: de-

lete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-

tries, the letters for which there is an entry

are displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right

quickly.

All letters for which there are entries

are displayed on the left edge.

2. Select the first letter of the desired en-

try.

The first entry of the selected letter is

displayed.

Programmable memory but-

tons

General information

The Central Information Display (CID) func-

tions can be stored on the programmable

memory buttons and called up directly, for

instance radio stations, phone numbers, and

menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Storing a function

1. Select the function via the Central Infor-

mation Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired but-

ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing a function

Press the button.

The function will work immediately.

This means, for instance that the number is

dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear

gloves or use objects.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed

in the upper area of the Control Display.

Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously

for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

Seite 41

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

General settings

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Language

Setting the language

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. If necessary, "Language"

4. "Language:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Time

Setting the time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired

hours are displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-

nutes are displayed.

8. Press the Controller.

Setting the time format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time format:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Date

Setting the date

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Date:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired day

is displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

7. Make the settings for the month and

year.

Seite 42

AT A GLANCE General settings

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Setting the date format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Date format:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Setting the units of measure-

ment

You can set the units of measurement for

some values, for example, consumption, dis-

tances and temperature.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Units"

4. Select the desired menu item.

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Activating/deactivating the

display of the current vehicle

position

Concept

If vehicle tracking has been activated, the

current vehicle position can be displayed in

the MINI Connected app.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Vehicle tracking"

4. "Vehicle tracking"

5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating

popup windows

For some functions, popup windows are dis-

played automatically on the Control Display.

Some of these popup windows can be acti-

vated or deactivated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Pop-ups"

4. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Control Display

Brightness

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired

brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

Seite 43

General settings AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Depending on the light conditions, the

brightness settings may not be clearly visi-

ble.

Screensaver

If no entries are made via the Central Infor-

mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be

displayed after an adjustable time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Screensaver"

6. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Messages

Concept

The menu centrally displays all messages ar-

riving in the vehicle in list form.

General information

The following messages can be displayed:

– Traffic messages.

– Check Control messages.

– Messages on service notifications.

– Messages from the vehicle manufac-

turer.

Messages are additionally displayed in the

status field.

Retrieving messages

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

The menu in which the message is dis-

played will open.

Deleting messages

All messages, except Check Control mes-

sages or messages from the vehicle manu-

facturer, can be deleted from the list.

Check Control messages or messages from

the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as

long as they are relevant.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

3. Press the button.

4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all

notifications"

Adjusting

The following settings can be adjusted:

– Select the applications, from which mes-

sages will be permitted.

– Sort the messages according to date or

priority.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Notifications"

4. Select the desired setting.

Seite 44

AT A GLANCE General settings

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Data protection

Data transfer

Concept

The vehicle offers various functions which

require data to be transferred to MINI or a

service provider. The data transfer can be

deactivated for some functions.

General information

With data transfer deactivated, the respec-

tive function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activating/deactivating

Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-

play.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Data privacy"

4. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in the

vehicle

Concept

Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores

personal data, such as stored radio stations.

This personal data can be permanently de-

leted via the Central Information Display

(CID).

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

following data is deleted:

– Driver profile settings.

– Stored radio stations.

– Stored programmable memory buttons.

– Travel and Onboard Computer informa-

tion.

– Phone book.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take

up to 15 minutes.

Functional requirement

Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data

Note and follow the instructions on the Con-

trol Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Data privacy"

4. "Delete personal data"

5. "Delete personal data"

6. "OK"

7. Exit and lock the vehicle.

The deletion process takes 15 minutes to

complete.

If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele-

tion.

Canceling deletion

Start the engine to cancel deletion of the

data.

Connections

Concept

Various connection types are available for

using mobile devices in the vehicle. The

connection type to select depends on the

mobile device and the desired function.

Seite 45

General settings AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

General information

The following overview shows possible

functions and the suitable connection types

for them. The scope of functions depends on

the mobile device.

Function Connec-

tion type

Making calls via the hands-

free system.

Using phone functions via

the Central Information Dis-

play (CID).

Bluetooth.

Playing music from the

smartphone or the audio

player.

Bluetooth

or USB.

USB storage device:

Playing music.

USB.

The following connection types require one-

time pairing with the vehicle:

– Bluetooth.

Paired devices are automatically recognized

later on and connected to the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys-

tems and communication devices while

driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-

sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is

a risk of accident. Only use the systems or

devices when the traffic situation allows.

As warranted, stop and use the systems

and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General information

Malfunctions may occur with devices not

listed or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identification

number and software part number

When looking for compatible devices, you

may have to state the vehicle identification

number and the software part number.

These numbers can be displayed in the ve-

hicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth® info"

6. "System information"

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements

– Compatible device, refer to page 46,

with Bluetooth interface.

– The vehicle key is in the vehicle.

– The device is ready for operation.

– Bluetooth is activated on the device and

in the vehicle, refer to page 46.

– Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility,

may be required on the device; refer to

the owner's manual of the device.

Switching on Bluetooth

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

Seite 46

AT A GLANCE General settings

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth®"

Pairing the mobile device with the

vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the de-

vice will be used:

– "Telephone"

– "Bluetooth® audio"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-

played on the Control Display.

6. On the mobile device, search for Blue-

tooth devices in the vicinity.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-

pears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi-

cle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-

trol number is displayed or the control

number must be entered.

– Compare the control number dis-

played on the Control Display with

the control number on the display of

the device.

Confirm the control number on the

device and on the Control Display.

– Enter and confirm the same control

number on the device and via the

Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed

in the device list.

If connection was not successful: Fre-

quently Asked Questions, refer to page 47.

Frequently Asked Questions

All requirements are met and all required

steps were completed in the specified order.

Despite that, the mobile device does not

function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can

help:

Why could the mobile phone not be paired

or connected?

– There are too many Bluetooth devices

connected to the mobile phone or vehi-

cle.

In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec-

tions with other devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connections

from the device list on the mobile phone

and start a new device search.

– The mobile phone is in power-save mode

or has only a limited remaining battery

life.

Charge the mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer re-

act?

– The applications on the mobile phone do

not function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and on

again.

– Possibly too high or too low ambient

temperatures for mobile phone opera-

tion.

Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-

treme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used via

the Central Information Display (CID)?

– The mobile phone may not be properly

configured, for instance as Bluetooth au-

dio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the tele-

phone function.

Why are no or not all phone book entries

displayed or why are they incomplete?

Seite 47

General settings AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– Transmission of the phone book entries

is not yet complete.

– It is possible that only the phone book

entries of the mobile phone or the SIM

card are transmitted.

– It may not be possible to display phone

book entries with special characters.

– It may not be possible to transmit con-

tacts from social networks.

– The number of phone book entries to be

stored is too high.

– Data volume of the contact too large, for

instance due to stored information such

as notes.

Reduce the data volume of the contact.

– A mobile phone is only connected as an

audio source.

Reconfigure the mobile phone and con-

nect it with the telephone function.

How can the phone connection quality be

improved?

– The strength of the Bluetooth signal on

the mobile phone can be adjusted, de-

pending on the mobile phone.

If all points in this list have been checked

and the required function is still not availa-

ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service

center or another qualified service center or

repair shop.

USB connection

General information

The following mobile devices can be con-

nected to the USB port:

– Mobile phones.

– Audio devices with USB port, for in-

stance MP3 players.

– USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported.

FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended

formats.

A connected USB storage device will be

supplied with charge current via the USB

port if the device supports this. Follow the

maximum charge current of the USB port.

USB ports with data transfer can be used to

play the music files via USB Audio.

Follow the following when connecting:

– Do not use force when plugging the con-

nector into the USB port.

– Use a flexible adapter cable.

– Protect the USB storage device against

mechanical damage.

– Due to the large number of USB storage

devices available on the market, it can-

not be guaranteed that every device is

operable on the vehicle.

– Do not expose USB storage devices to

extreme environmental conditions, such

as very high temperatures; refer to the

owner's manual of the device.

– Due to the many different compression

techniques, proper playback of the me-

dia stored on the USB storage device

cannot be guaranteed in all cases.

– To ensure proper transmission of the

stored data, do not charge a USB storage

device via the onboard socket, when it

is connected to the USB port.

– Depending on how the USB storage de-

vice is being used, settings may be re-

quired on the USB storage device, refer

to the owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB media:

– USB hard drives.

– USB hubs.

– USB memory card readers with multiple

slots.

– HFS-formatted or NTFS-formatted USB

storage devices.

– Devices such as fans or lamps.

Seite 48

AT A GLANCE General settings

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Functional requirement

Compatible device, refer to page 46, with

USB port.

Connecting the device

Connect the USB device using a suitable

adapter cable to a USB port, refer to

page 199.

The USB device is connected to the vehicle

and displayed in the device list.

Managing mobile devices

General information

– After one-time pairing, the devices are

automatically recognized and recon-

nected when the ignition is switched on.

– The data stored on the SIM card or in

the mobile phone is transferred to the

vehicle after recognition.

– For some devices, certain settings may

be necessary, for instance authorization,

see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device list

All devices paired and/or connected with

the vehicle are displayed in the device list.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

A symbol indicates, for which function a de-

vice is used.

Symbol Function

"Telephone"

"Bluetooth® audio"

Configuring the device

Functions can be activated or deactivated

for paired and connected devices.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select the desired device.

5. Select the desired setting.

If a function is assigned to a device, the

function will be deactivated where appro-

priate for a device that is already connected

and the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the device

The device's connection to the vehicle is

disconnected.

The device remains paired and can be con-

nected again, refer to page 49.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the device

A disconnected device can be reconnected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the de-

vice before disconnecting are assigned to

the device when it is reconnected. The func-

tions may be deactivated on a device al-

ready connected.

Seite 49

General settings AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Deleting the device

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removed

from the device list.

Seite 50

AT A GLANCE General settings

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

You can use the following media formats to

call up the content in the Owner's Manual:

– Printed Owner's Manual, refer to

page 51.

Printed Owner's Manual

Concept

The printed Owner's Manual describes all

standard, country-specific, and optional fea-

tures offered with the series.

General information

The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-

tainment, and Communication can be ob-

tained as a printed book from the service

center.

Supplementary Owner's Manuals

Also follow the Supplementary Owner's

Manuals, which are included in addition to

the onboard literature.

Seite 51

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Vehicle key

General information

The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle

keys with integrated key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-

tery, refer to page 55.

Depending on the equipment and country

version, various settings, refer to page 66,

can be configured for the button functions.

A personal driver profile, refer to page 65,

for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.

To provide information on maintenance re-

quirements, the service data is stored in the

vehicle key, refer to page 282.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle

key, take the vehicle key with you when ex-

iting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

People or animals in the vehicle can lock

the doors from the inside and lock them-

selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot

be opened from the outside. There is a risk

of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so

that the vehicle can be opened from the

outside.

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible

with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the

vehicle while being exposed to extreme

temperatures are at risk of injury or death.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

when there are people in it.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve-

hicle can cause the vehicle to move and

endanger themselves and traffic, for in-

stance due to the following actions:

– Pressing the Start/Stop button.

– Releasing the parking brake.

– Opening and closing the doors or

windows.

– Engaging selector lever position N.

– Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do

not leave children or animals unattended

in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with

you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Seite 52

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

With automatic tailgate operation: open

the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking

Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, refer to

page 66, the following access points are

unlocked.

– Driver's door and fuel filler flap.

Press the button on the vehicle key

again to unlock the other vehicle access

points.

– All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.

In addition, the following functions are exe-

cuted:

– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig-

nals and the horn. This function must be

activated in the settings, refer to

page 66.

– The settings stored in the driver profile,

refer to page 65, are applied.

– The driver's seat is set to the last posi-

tion saved in the driver's profile. This

function must be activated in the set-

tings, refer to page 66.

– The interior lights, refer to page 136,

and the MINI logo projection are

switched on, provided that the interior

lights were not switched off manually.

– Depending on the settings, the welcome

light and pathway lighting, refer to

page 133, are switched on.

– Exterior mirrors folded through conven-

ient closing are folded open.

– The alarm system, refer to page 67, is

switched off.

The light functions may depend on the am-

bient brightness.

Convenient opening

Press and hold the button on the ve-

hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are

opened, as long as the button on the vehicle

key is pressed.

Locking

1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press the button on the vehicle

key.

The following functions are executed:

– All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler

flap are locked.

– Locking is confirmed by the turn signals

and the horn. This function must be ac-

tivated in the settings, refer to

page 66.

– The alarm system, refer to page 67, is

switched on.

If the engine or ignition is still switched on

when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn

honks twice. In this case, the engine or ig-

nition must be switched off by means of the

Start/Stop button.

Seite 53

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

With Comfort Access: convenient

closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can

be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the

doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold the button on the ve-

hicle key in the area close to the ve-

hicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof are

closed, as long as the button on the vehicle

key is pressed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Switch on interior lights and

courtesy light

Press the button on the vehicle key

with the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switched

on.

These functions are not available if the inte-

rior lights were switched off manually.

The light functions may depend on the am-

bient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before press-

ing the button again.

Tailgate

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-

cle, do not place the remote control in the

cargo area.

Depending on the equipment and country

version, it is possible to specify whether the

tailgate can be activated with the vehicle

key and how the vehicle doors will respond

to this. To perform settings, refer to

page 66.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating

the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the tail-

gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-

erty. Make sure that the area of movement

of the tailgate is clear during opening and

closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the

windows and heat conductors while driv-

ing. There is a risk of damage to property.

Cover the edges and ensure that pointed

objects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Press and hold the button on the ve-

hicle key for approx. 1 second.

Without automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung

upward.

With automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate opens automatically.

Seite 54

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find

yourself in a dangerous situation.

– Press the button on the vehicle

key and hold for at least 3 sec-

onds.

– Briefly press the button on the vehicle

key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Replacing the battery

1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-

hicle key, refer to page 57.

2. Slide the integrated key into the open-

ing and raise the cover.

The battery compartment is accessible.

3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of

the battery compartment and raise the

cover.

4. Push battery in the direction of the ar-

row using a pointed object and lift it

out.

5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the

positive side facing up.

6. Insert lid and cover.

7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle

key until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by a

dealer’s service center or another

qualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keys

Additional vehicle keys are available from a

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Loss of vehicle keys

A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re-

placed by a dealer’s service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair

shop.

Malfunction

General information

A Check Control message is displayed.

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may

malfunction under the following circum-

stances:

Seite 55

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-

charged. For replacing the battery, refer

to page 55.

– Interference of the radio connection

from transmission towers or other

equipment with high transmitting

power.

– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal

objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-

gether with metal objects.

– Interference of the radio connection

from mobile phones or other electronic

devices in direct proximity to the vehi-

cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-

gether with electronic devices.

– Interference of radio transmission by a

charging process of mobile devices, for

instance charging of a mobile phone.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can

be unlocked and locked from the outside

with the integrated key, refer to page 56.

Starting the engine via emergency

detection of the Vehicle key

It is not possible to start the engine if the

vehicle key has not been detected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark

on the steering column as shown. Pay

attention to the display in the instru-

ment cluster.

2. If the vehicle key is detected:

Start the engine within 10 seconds.

If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly

change the position of the vehicle key and

repeat the procedure.

Frequently Asked Questions

What precautions can be taken to be able to

open a vehicle with an accidentally locked

in vehicle key?

– The options provided by the Remote

Services of the MINI Connected app in-

clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-

hicle.

This requires an active MINI Connected

contract and the MINI Connected app

must be installed on a smartphone.

– Unlocking the vehicle can be requested

via the MINI Connected Call Center.

An active MINI Connected contract is

required.

Integrated key

General information

The driver's door can be locked and un-

locked without the vehicle key using the

integrated key.

Safety information

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible

with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the

vehicle while being exposed to extreme

temperatures are at risk of injury or death.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

when there are people in it.

Seite 56

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined with

the door. The door handle can be moved.

When pulling the door handle with the

integrated key inserted, paint or the

integrated key can be damaged. There is a

risk of damage to property. Remove the

integrated key before pulling the outside

door handle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the

integrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the door

lock

1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key into

the opening from below and remove the

lid.

2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the

integrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or locked

from the inside.

Alarm system

The alarm system is not switched on if the

vehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when the

door is opened, if the vehicle has been un-

locked via the door lock.

Buttons for the central locking

system

General information

In the event of a severe accident, the vehi-

cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard

warning system and interior lights come on.

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Press the button with the front

doors closed.

– The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

– The vehicle is not secured against theft

when locking.

Seite 57

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Unlocking

Press the button.

Opening

– Press button to unlock the doors

together, and then pull the door handle

above the armrest.

– Front doors: pull the door handle on the

door to open the door. The other doors

remain locked.

– Back doors: pull twice on the door han-

dle on the door to be opened; the first

time unlocks the door, the second time

opens it. The other doors remain locked.

Comfort Access

Concept

The vehicle can be accessed without operat-

ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in

your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-

cle key when it is in close proximity or in

the car's interior.

General information

Comfort Access supports the following

functions:

– Unlocking and locking the vehicle.

– Convenient closing.

– Open the tailgate.

– Opening/closing the tailgate with no-

touch activation.

This function must be activated in the

settings, refer to page 66.

This function is not available in vehicles

with a trailer hitch or with a rear lug-

gage rack preparation.

Functional requirements

– To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must

be outside of the vehicle near the doors.

– The next unlocking and locking cycle is

not possible until after approx. 2 sec-

onds.

Unlocking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer

door handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer to

page 66, only the driver's door and the

fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike

when unlocking using the vehicle key,

pressing the button on the outer door han-

dle again does not unlock the other vehicle

access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked

again.

If the vehicle was locked automatically after

driving off or with the button of the central

locking system from the inside, note the fol-

lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is

opened from the inside with the door

opener, pressing the button on the outer

door handle will first lock the vehicle again.

To unlock, the button on the outer door han-

dle must be pressed again.

Seite 58

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Locking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer

door handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can

be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the

doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold down the button on the driv-

er's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows and

glass sunroof will be closed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

To open the tailgate

General information

If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,

locked doors are not unlocked.

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-

cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo

area.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating

the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the tail-

gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-

erty. Make sure that the area of movement

of the tailgate is clear during opening and

closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the

windows and heat conductors while driv-

ing. There is a risk of damage to property.

Cover the edges and ensure that pointed

objects do not hit the windows.

Seite 59

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Opening

Press button next on tailgate.

Without automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung

upward.

With automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate opens automatically.

With automatic tailgate actuation:

touchless opening and closing of

tailgate

Concept

The tailgate can be opened and closed with

no-touch activation using the vehicle key

you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for-

ward-directed foot motion in the central

rear area and the tailgate is opened or

closed.

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-

cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo

area.

This function is not available in vehicles

with a trailer hitch or with a rear luggage

rack preparation.

If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the

tailgate may open or close inadvertently if

you unintentionally move your foot or if a

foot movement is detected.

The sensor has an approximate range of

5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the

vehicle.

If the tailgate is opened with no-touch acti-

vation, locked doors are not unlocked.

Contactless opening and closing of the tail-

gate must be activated in the settings.

Safety information

Warning

During no-touch activation, vehicle parts

may be touched, such as the hot exhaust

gas system. There is a risk of injury. When

moving your foot, make sure you have a

firm stance and do not touch the vehicle.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating

the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the tail-

gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-

erty. Make sure that the area of movement

of the tailgate is clear during opening and

closing.

Adjusting

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Tailgate"

5. Select the desired setting:

– "Open by foot movement"

Seite 60

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Contactless opening of the tailgate is

switched on or off.

– "Close by foot movement"

Contactless closing of the tailgate is

switched on or off.

Performing the foot movement

1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle

at approx. one arm's length away from

the rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di-

rection of travel and immediately pull it

back. With this movement, the leg must

pass through the ranges of both sensors.

Opening

Perform the foot movement described ear-

lier.

Before the opening, the hazard warning sys-

tem flashes.

If touchless closing is switched on:

Moving a foot again will stop the opening

process.

The subsequent foot movement will close

the tailgate again.

Closing

Perform the foot movement described ear-

lier.

Before closing, the hazard warning system

flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.

Moving a foot again will stop the closing

process.

When the touchless opening is switched on:

the subsequent foot movement will open

the tailgate again.

Malfunction

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may

malfunction under the following circum-

stances:

– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-

charged. For replacing the battery, refer

to page 55.

– Interference of the radio connection

from transmission towers or other

equipment with high transmitting

power.

– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal

objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-

gether with metal objects.

– Interference of the radio connection

from mobile phones or other electronic

devices in direct proximity to the vehi-

cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-

gether with electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the

locking request recognition function on the

door handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and

lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve-

hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to

page 56.

Tailgate

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-

cle, do not place the remote control in the

cargo area.

Depending on the equipment and country

version, it is possible to specify whether the

Seite 61

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

tailgate can be activated with the vehicle

key and how the vehicle doors will respond

to this. To perform settings, refer to

page 66.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating

the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the tail-

gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-

erty. Make sure that the area of movement

of the tailgate is clear during opening and

closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the

windows and heat conductors while driv-

ing. There is a risk of damage to property.

Cover the edges and ensure that pointed

objects do not hit the windows.

Without automatic tailgate

operation

Opening from the outside

– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-

cle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press button next on tailgate.

– Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may

also be unlocked. Unlocking with the ve-

hicle key, refer to page 54.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung

upward.

Opening from the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull the

button in the storage compartment of the

driver's door upwards.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-

tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull the

button in the storage compartment of the

driver's door upwards twice in quick suc-

cession.

Closing

Recessed grips on the interior trim of the

tailgate can be used to conveniently pull

down the tailgate.

Seite 62

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

With automatic tailgate operation

Opening

Adjusting the opening height

You can set how far the tailgate should

open.

When adjusting the opening height, ensure

that there is a clearance of at least

4 in/10 cm above the tailgate.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Tailgate"

5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired

opening height.

From the outside

– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-

cle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

– Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may

also be unlocked. Unlocking using the

vehicle key, refer to page 54.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate

opens automatically to the adjusted opening

height.

From the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

Pull button in the storage compart-

ment of the driver's door upward.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-

tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull the

button in the storage compartment of the

driver's door upwards twice in quick suc-

cession.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate

opens automatically to the adjusted opening

height.

Interruption of the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in the

following situations:

– When the vehicle starts moving.

– By pressing the button on the outside of

the tailgate. Pressing again closes the

tailgate.

– By pressing the button on the inside of

the tailgate. Pressing again closes the

tailgate.

– By pressing the button on the vehicle

key. Pressing again continues the open-

ing motion.

– By pressing or pulling the button in the

storage compartment of the driver's

door. Pulling again continues the open-

ing motion.

Closing

From the outside

Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

Seite 63

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

From the inside

Press and hold the button in the stor-

age compartment of the driver's door.

The vehicle key must be located in the car’s

interior for this function.

An acoustic signal sounds before the tail-

gate is closed.

From inside the tailgate

Without Comfort Access:

Press the button on the inside of the tail-

gate.

With Comfort Access:

– Press button on the inside of the tail-

gate, arrow 1.

– Press button, arrow 2.

The vehicle will be locked after closing

the tailgate. The driver's door must be

closed for this purpose and the vehicle

key must be outside of the vehicle in the

area of the tailgate.

Interruption of the closing procedure

The closing procedure is interrupted in the

following situations:

– If the vehicle starts off with a jerky

movement.

– By pressing the button on the outside of

the tailgate. Pressing again closes the

tailgate.

– By pressing the button on the inside of

the tailgate. Pressing again closes the

tailgate.

– By releasing the button in the storage

compartment of the driver's door. Press-

ing again and holding continues the

closing motion.

Malfunction

Safety information

Warning

With manual operation of a blocked tail-

gate, it can release itself unexpectedly

from the blockage. There is a risk of injury

or risk of damage to property. Do not oper-

ate the tailgate manually if it is blocked.

Have it checked by a dealer’s service cen-

ter or another qualified service center or

repair shop.

Manual operation

Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with

a slow and smooth motion.

To close the tailgate fully, press down

lightly only. Closing occurs automatically.

Seite 64

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driver profiles

Concept

In the driver profiles, individual settings for

several drivers can be stored and called up

again when required.

General information

There are three driver profiles with which

personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev-

ery vehicle key has been assigned one of

these driver profiles.

If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle

key, the assigned personal driver profile will

be activated. All settings stored in the

driver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own vehicle

keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set-

tings as it is being unlocked. These settings

are also restored, if the vehicle has been

used in the meantime by a person with a

different vehicle key.

Changes to the settings are automatically

stored in the driver profile currently acti-

vated.

Functional requirements

For the system to be able to identify the

driver profile associated to a particular

driver, the detected vehicle key must be

clearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

– The driver is only carrying his or her

own vehicle key.

– The driver unlocks the vehicle.

– The driver gets into the vehicle through

the driver's door.

Adjusting

The settings for the following systems and

functions are stored in the active profile.

The scope of storable settings depends on

country and equipment.

– Unlocking and locking.

– Lights.

– Radio.

– Instrument cluster.

– Programmable memory buttons.

– Volumes, tone.

– Control Display.

– Climate control.

– PDC Park Distance Control.

– Rearview camera.

– MINI Driving Modes.

– Intelligent Safety.

– Driver's seat position, exterior mirror

position.

Both the positions saved via the seat

memory and the last position set are

saved.

System limits

A clear assignment between the vehicle key

and driver may not be possible in the fol-

lowing cases, for example.

– The passenger unlocks the vehicle with

his or her own vehicle key, but another

person is driving.

– The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com-

fort Access and has multiple vehicle

keys with him or her.

– The driver changes, but the vehicle is

not locked and unlocked.

– Multiple vehicle keys are located out-

side of the vehicle.

Seite 65

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting

General information

Depending on the package and country ver-

sion, various settings are available for the

vehicle key functions.

These settings are stored for the driver pro-

file, refer to page 65, currently used.

Unlocking

Doors

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"

5. Select the desired setting:

– "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel

filler flap are unlocked. Pressing

again unlocks the entire vehicle.

– "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Tailgate

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

The text next to the symbol indicates

the current setting.

5. Select the desired setting:

– "Tailgate"

Depending on your vehicle's optional

features, the tailgate is either un-

locked or opened.

– "Tailgate and door(s)"

Depending on your vehicle's optional

features, the tailgate is either un-

locked or opened and the doors un-

locked.

– "Tailgate opens after unlocking"

The vehicle must be unlocked before

the tailgate can be used with the ve-

hicle key.

– "Button lock"

It is not possible to use the tailgate

via the vehicle key.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

country version, this setting may not be of-

fered.

Automatic locking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Select the desired setting:

– "Lock automatically"

The vehicle locks automatically after

a while if no door is opened after un-

locking.

– "Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically after

you drive off.

Automatic unlocking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After the engine is switched off by

pressing the Start/Stop button, the

Seite 66

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

locked vehicle is automatically un-

locked.

Confirmation signals from the

vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-

firmation signals.

– "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,

locking by one.

– With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk of

the horn.

Alarm system

General information

When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle

alarm system reacts to the following

changes:

– Unauthorized opening of a door, the

hood or the tailgate.

– Movements in the car's interior.

– Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance,

during attempts at stealing a wheel or

when towing the vehicle.

– Disconnected battery voltage.

– Improper use of the socket for Onboard

Diagnosis.

– Locking the vehicle while a device is

connected to the socket for the OBD On-

board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD

Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 283.

The alarm system signals these changes vis-

ually and acoustically:

– Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the

acoustic alarm may be suppressed.

– Visual alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning sys-

tem and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure func-

tion of the alarm system.

Overview

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/off

The alarm system is switched on or off as

soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi-

cle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort

Access.

Opening the doors with the alarm

system switched on

The alarm system is triggered when a door

is opened if the door was unlocked using

the integrated key in the door lock.

Switching off the alarm, refer to page 68.

Opening the tailgate with the alarm

system switched on

The tailgate can be opened even when the

alarm system is switched on.

Seite 67

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and

monitored again provided the doors are

locked. The hazard warning system flashes

once.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find

yourself in a dangerous situation.

– Press the button on the vehicle

key and hold for at least 3 sec-

onds.

– Briefly press the button on the vehicle

key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Signals of the indicator lights

– The indicator light flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

– Indicator light flashes for approx.

10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm

sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or

tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor-

rectly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points are

closed, the interior motion sensor and

tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

– The indicator light goes out after un-

locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

– The indicator light flashes after unlock-

ing until the engine ignition is switched

on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi-

nutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations

such as attempts to steal a wheel or when

the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor

The windows and the glass sunroof must be

closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General information

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion

sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un-

authorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

– In automatic vehicle washes.

– In duplex garages.

– During transport on trains carrying ve-

hicles, at sea or on a trailer.

– With animals in the vehicle.

– When the vehicle is locked after start of

fueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-

tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-

uations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor

Press the button on the vehicle key

within 10 seconds as soon as the

vehicle is locked.

The indicator light lights up for approx.

2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion

sensor are switched off until the vehicle is

locked again.

Switching off the alarm

– Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.

– Unlock the vehicle with the integrated

key and switch on the ignition using the

Seite 68

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

emergency detection of the vehicle key,

refer to page 55.

– With Comfort Access: if you have the

vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle

using the button on the driver's side or

passenger side door.

Power windows

General information

If an accident of a certain severity occurs,

the windows are automatically closed ex-

cept a gap.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is a risk

of injury or risk of damage to property.

Make sure that the area of movement of

the windows is clear during opening and

closing.

Overview

Power windows.

Safety switch.

Opening

– Press the switch to the resistance

point.

The window opens while the switch is

being held.

– Press the switch beyond the resist-

ance point.

The window opens automatically. Press-

ing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening with the vehicle key,

refer to page 53.

Closing

– Pull the switch to the resistance

point.

The window closes while the switch is

being held.

– Pull the switch beyond the resist-

ance point.

The window closes automatically if the

door is closed. Pulling the switch again

stops the motion.

Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re-

fer to page 54.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer to

page 59.

Jam protection system

Concept

The jam protection prevents objects or body

parts becoming jammed between the door

frame and window while a window is being

closed.

General information

If resistance or a blockage is detected while

a window is being closed, the closing action

is interrupted.

Seite 69

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The window opens slightly.

Safety information

Warning

Accessories on the windows such as an-

tennas can impact jam protection. There is

a risk of injury. Do not install accessories

in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection

system

In case of danger from the outside or if ice

might prevent normal closing, proceed as

follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance

point and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam pro-

tection. If the closing force exceeds a

specific threshold, closing is inter-

rupted.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance

point again within approx. 4 seconds

and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protec-

tion.

Safety switch

General information

The safety switch can be used to prevent

children, for instance from opening and

closing the rear windows using the

switches in the rear.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs,

the safety function is switched off automati-

cally.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED lights up if the safety func-

tion is switched on.

Malfunction

General information

In certain situations a window can only be

operated to a limited extent.

– After a power failure during the opening

or closing process, the a window can

only be operated to a limited extent. The

system must be initialized in this case.

– The power window motors are equipped

with overheating protection. If a win-

dow is opened and closed several times

within a short period of time, the over-

heating protection switches the motor

off temporarily. Depending on the de-

gree of overheating, it may only be pos-

sible to close the window or it may not

be possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power window

motor to cool down.

Initializing the system

The system can be initialized when the ve-

hicle is stationary and the engine is run-

ning.

During initialization, the affected window

closes without jam protection.

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is a risk

of injury or risk of damage to property.

Make sure that the area of movement of

Seite 70

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

the windows is clear during opening and

closing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. Pull the switch to the resistance

point and hold.

The window closes.

3. Continue holding the switch pulled

to the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once or

twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend-

ing on the vehicle's equipment.

4. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof

General information

In the event of a severe accident, the glass

sunroof is automatically closed.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating

the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the area of movement of

the glass sunroof is clear during opening

and closing.

Overview

Tilting the glass sunroof

Press back the switch up to or

beyond the resistance point

and release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

Press the switch back beyond

the resistance point and re-

lease it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again

stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely

raised

– Slide switch back to the re-

sistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is

opened as long as the

switch is pressed.

– Press the switch back beyond the resist-

ance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo-

tion.

Comfort position

In some models, the wind noises in the car's

interior are lowest when the glass sunroof

is not fully open. In these models, the auto-

matic function initially only opens the glass

sunroof up to this comfort position.

Pressing the switch again opens the glass

sunroof fully.

Seite 71

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open

– Slide switch forward to the

resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is closed

as long as the switch is

pressed and stops in the

raised position.

– Press the switch forward beyond the re-

sistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops in

the raised position.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo-

tion.

– Press the switch forward beyond the re-

sistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo-

tion.

With the glass sunroof completely

raised

Press the switch forward be-

yond the resistance point and

release it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Jam protection system

Concept

The jam protection prevents objects or body

parts from becoming jammed between the

roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-

roof is closing.

General information

If resistance or a blockage is detected while

the glass sunroof is being closed, the clos-

ing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection

system

If there is an external danger, proceed as

follows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resist-

ance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes with limited

jam protection. If the closing force ex-

ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-

terrupted.

2. Push the switch forward again past the

resistance point and hold until the glass

sunroof closes without jam protection.

Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power

interruption

After a power failure during the opening or

closing process, the glass sunroof can only

be operated to a limited extent. The system

must be initialized in this case. MINI rec-

ommends having this work performed only

by a dealer's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

Seite 72

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Sitting safely

An ideal seating position that meets the

needs of the occupants can make a vital

contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seat-

ing position plays an important role. Follow

the information in the following chapters:

– Seats, refer to page 73.

– Safety belts, refer to page 77.

– Head restraints, refer to page 79.

– Airbags, refer to page 138.

Front seats

Safety information

Warning

Seat adjustments while driving can lead to

unexpected movements of the seat. Vehi-

cle control could be lost. There is a risk of

accident. Only adjust the seat on the driv-

er's side when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to the

rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no

longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid-

ing under the safety belt in an accident.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.

Adjust the backrest so that it is in the

most upright position as possible and do

not adjust again while driving.

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. Make sure that the

area of movement of the seat is clear prior

to any adjustment.

Manually adjustable seats

Overview

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Seite 73

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-

sired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat for-

ward or back slightly making sure it en-

gages properly.

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as

needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the

backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be

adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-

bar region of the spine. The lower back and

the spine are supported for upright posture.

Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-

crease the curvature.

Electrically adjustable seats

General information

The current seat position can be stored us-

ing the memory function, refer to page 81.

Overview

1 Memory function

2 Lumbar support

3 Backrest tilt

4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Seite 74

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Forward/backward

Push switch forward or backward.

Height

Push switch up or down.

Seat tilt

Move switch up or down.

Backrest tilt

Move switch forward or backward.

Lumbar support

Concept

The curvature of the seat backrest can be

adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-

bar region of the spine. The lower back and

the spine are supported for upright posture.

Adjusting

– Press the front/rear sec-

tion of the button:

The curvature is in-

creased/decreased.

– Press the upper/lower sec-

tion of the button:

The curvature is shifted

up/down.

Seite 75

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad-

just the thigh support.

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching on

Press the button once for each tem-

perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when

three LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx.

15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is acti-

vated automatically with the temperature

selected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to

page 218, the heating output is reduced.

Switching off

Press and hold the button until the

LEDs go out.

Rear seats

Safety information

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when folding

down the center armrest in the rear. There

is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area

of movement of the center armrest is clear

during folding down.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seat

backrest while driving may occur due to

unintentional unlocking of the rear seat

backrests by the straps. There is a risk of

injury. Only use straps for releasing the

rear seat backrests. Do not attach objects

on the straps.

Forward/backward

General information

The rear seat is divided at a ratio of 60 to

40. The left seat is connected to the center

section.

Seite 76

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-

sired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat for-

ward or back slightly making sure it en-

gages properly.

Backrest tilt

Pull the strap and apply your weight to the

backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

After the adjustment, move the backrest

slightly forward or back to engage it cor-

rectly.

Safety belts

Number of safety belts and safety

belt buckles

The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to

ensure occupant safety. However, they can

only offer protection when adjusted cor-

rectly.

The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear

seat are intended for the persons sitting on

the left and right.

The center safety belt buckle of the rear

seat is intended for the person sitting in the

middle.

General information

Always make sure that safety belts are be-

ing worn by all occupants before driving off.

Although airbags enhance safety by provid-

ing added protection, they are not a substi-

tute for safety belts.

If needed, disengage the safety belt in the

rear from the belt buckle on the side.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point

will be correct for adult seat occupants of

every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a safety belt to buckle more than

one person will potentially defeat the abil-

ity of the safety belt to serve its protective

function. There is a risk of injuries or dan-

ger to life. Do not allow more than one per-

son to wear a single safety belt. Infants

and children are not allowed on an occu-

pant's lap, but must be transported and se-

cured in designated child restraint sys-

tems.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including

safety belts, can be limited or lost when

safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An

incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause

additional injuries, for instance in the

event of an accident, braking or evasive

maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or

Seite 77

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

danger to life. Make sure that all occu-

pants are wearing safety belts correctly.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including

safety belts, may not be fully functional or

fail in the following situations:

– The safety belts or safety belt buckles

are damaged, soiled, or changed in

any other way.

– Belt tensioners or belt retractors

were modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged

in the event of an accident. There is a risk

of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify

safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-

sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and

keep them clean. Have the safety belts

checked after an accident at the dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts

– Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight

to your body over your lap and should-

ers.

– Wear the safety belt deep on your hips

over your lap. The safety belt may not

press on your stomach.

– Do not rub the safety belt against sharp

edges, or guide it or jam it in across

hard or fragile objects.

– Avoid thick clothing.

– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up-

ward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt

1. Guide the safety belt slowly over

shoulder and hip to put it on.

2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety

belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must

engage audibly.

Unbuckling the safety belt

1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-

up mechanism.

Middle safety belt in the rear

Buckling the safety belt

1. Pull the buckle tongues out of the

mounts in the roof.

2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the

belt buckle, arrow 1.

3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the

belt buckle, arrow 2.

Safety belt buckles must audibly click

into place.

Seite 78

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Unbuckling the safety belt

1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to open

the second safety belt buckle, arrow 2.

4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the

roofliner.

Safety belt reminder for driver's

seat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light lights up and a

signal sounds. Make sure that the

safety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder can also be acti-

vated if objects are placed on the front pas-

senger seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re-

moved or not correctly adjusted head re-

straints can cause injuries in the head and

neck area. There is a risk of injury.

– Before driving, install the removed

head restraints on the occupied seats.

– Adjust the head restraint so its center

supports the back of the head at as

close to eye level as possible.

– Adjust the distance so that the head

restraint is as close as possible to the

back of the head. Adjust the distance

via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving

the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the area of movement is

clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the

protective effect in the head and neck

area. There is a risk of injury.

– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-

ers.

– Do not hang objects, for instance

clothes hangers, directly on the head

restraint.

– Only use accessories that have been

determined to be safe for attachment

to a head restraint.

– Do not use any accessories, for in-

stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height: John Cooper

Works sport seat

The height of the head restraints cannot be

set.

Seite 79

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting the height

– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

– To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the

head restraint engages correctly.

Removing: John Cooper Works

sport seat

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one

will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest

forward.

2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the

head restraint out completely.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to install the

head restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re-

moved or not correctly adjusted head re-

straints can cause injuries in the head and

neck area. There is a risk of injury.

– Before driving, install the removed

head restraints on the occupied seats.

– Adjust the head restraint so its center

supports the back of the head at as

close to eye level as possible.

– Adjust the distance so that the head

restraint is as close as possible to the

back of the head. Adjust the distance

via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving

the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the area of movement is

clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the

protective effect in the head and neck

area. There is a risk of injury.

– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-

ers.

– Do not hang objects, for instance

clothes hangers, directly on the head

restraint.

– Only use accessories that have been

determined to be safe for attachment

to a head restraint.

– Do not use any accessories, for in-

stance pillows, while driving.

Seite 80

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting the height

– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

– To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the

head restraint engages correctly.

Fold down

– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,

and press down the head restraint, ar-

row 2.

– Forward: fold the head restraint toward

the front as far as it will go. Make sure

that the head restraint engages cor-

rectly.

Removing

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Memory function

Concept

The following settings can be stored and, if

necessary, retrieved using the memory

function:

– Seat position.

– Exterior mirror position.

General information

Different settings can be assigned to two

memory locations.

The adjustment of the lumbar support is not

stored.

Safety information

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. Make sure that the

area of movement of the seat is clear prior

to any adjustment.

Warning

Using the memory function while driving

can lead to unexpected movements of the

seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is

a risk of accident. Only retrieve the mem-

ory function when the vehicle is station-

ary.

Seite 81

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

Storing

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in the

button lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the

LED is lit. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings

The stored position is called up automati-

cally.

Press the desired button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a seat adjust-

ment switch or one of the memory buttons

is pressed.

Once underway, adjustment of the seat po-

sition on the driver's side is disabled after a

short while.

Call up deactivated

After a brief period, calling up stored seat

positions is deactivated to save battery

power.

To reactivate calling up of a seat position:

– Open or close the door or tailgate.

– Press a button on the vehicle key.

– Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information

The mirror on the front passenger side is

more curved than the driver's side mirror.

The current exterior mirror position can be

stored using the memory function, refer to

page 81.

Safety information

Warning

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. The distance to the traf-

fic behind could be incorrectly estimated,

for instance while changing lanes. There is

a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to

the traffic behind by looking over your

shoulder.

Overview

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-

itor

3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:

Slide the switch.

Seite 82

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting electrically

Press the button.

The mirror movement follows the

button movement.

Malfunction

In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust

the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir-

ror glass.

Folding in and out

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi-

cle can be damaged in vehicle washes.

There is a risk of damage to property. Be-

fore washing, fold in the mirrors by hand

or with the button.

Press the button.

Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-

prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in

the following situations:

– In vehicle washes.

– On narrow roads.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out

automatically at a speed of approx.

25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are automatically

heated as needed and when the ignition is

switched on.

Automatic dimming feature

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is

automatically dimmed. Photocells in the

car's interior mirror, refer to page 84, are

used to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior

mirror

Concept

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass

on the front passenger side is tilted down-

ward. This improves your view of the curb

and other formatting issue - low-lying ob-

stacles when parking, for instance.

Activating

1. slide the switch to the driver's

side mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating

Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir-

ror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior

mirror, flip the lever forward.

Seite 83

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect

by the interior mirror.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming

feature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:

– In the mirror glass.

– On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements

– Keep the photocells clean.

– Do not cover the area between the inte-

rior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

Steering wheel adjustments while driving

can lead to unexpected steering wheel

movements. Vehicle control could be lost.

There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the

steering wheel while the vehicle is sta-

tionary only.

Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-

red height and angle to suit your seating

position.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Seite 84

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

The right place for children

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve-

hicle can cause the vehicle to move and

endanger themselves and traffic, for in-

stance due to the following actions:

– Pressing the Start/Stop button.

– Releasing the parking brake.

– Opening and closing the doors or

windows.

– Engaging selector lever position N.

– Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do

not leave children or animals unattended

in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with

you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

A heated vehicle may result in death to

persons, especially children, or animals.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Do not leave persons, especially children,

or animals unattended in the vehicle.

Warning

Exposure to intense sunlight can cause

child restraint systems and their compo-

nents to become very hot. Persons may

sustain burn injuries when touching the

hot components. There is a risk of injury.

Do not expose the child restraint system to

direct sunlight or cover where necessary.

If necessary, let the child restraint system

cool down before transporting a child. Do

not leave children unattended in the vehi-

cle.

Always transport children in the

rear seat

General information

Accident research shows that the safest

place for children is in the rear seat.

Transport children younger than 13 years of

age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the

rear seat in suitable child restraint systems

designed for the age, weight and size of the

child. Children 13 years of age or older must

wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child

restraint system can no longer be used due

to their age, weight, or size.

Seite 85

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The safety belt cannot be fastened cor-

rectly on children shorter than 5 ft,

150 cm without suitable additional child

restraint systems. The efficacy of safety

gear, including safety belts, can be limited

or lost when safety belts are fastened in-

correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety

belt can cause additional injuries, for in-

stance in the event of an accident, braking

or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-

juries or danger to life. Secure children

shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable

child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger

seat

General information

Before using a child restraint system on the

front passenger seat, ensure that the front,

knee, and side airbags on the front passen-

ger side are deactivated. For automatic de-

activation of front-seat passenger airbags,

refer to page 140.

Safety information

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-

jure a child in a child restraint system

when the airbags are activated. There is a

risk of injury. Make sure that the front-

seat passenger airbags are deactivated and

that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-

tor light lights up.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect

seat adjustment or improper installation of

the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or

danger to life. Make sure that the child re-

straint system fits securely against the

backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest

tilt for all affected backrests and correctly

adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and

backrests are securely engaged or locked.

If possible, adjust the height of the head

restraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint sys-

tems

General information

Pay attention to the specifications of the

child restraint system manufacturer when

selecting, installing, and using child re-

straint systems.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint sys-

tems and their fastening systems which

have been damaged or exposed to an acci-

dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot

be properly restrained in the event of an

accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Do not use child restraint systems which

have been damaged or exposed to an acci-

dent.

If a child restraint system and its fasten-

ing system has been damaged or exposed

to an accident, have these systems

checked and replaced by the dealer's serv-

Seite 86

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

ice center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect

seat adjustment or improper installation of

the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or

danger to life. Make sure that the child re-

straint system fits securely against the

backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest

tilt for all affected backrests and correctly

adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and

backrests are securely engaged or locked.

If possible, adjust the height of the head

restraints or remove them.

On the rear seats

If the vehicle is equipped with a sliding rear

seat row: move the seats to the rearmost po-

sition before mounting a child restraint sys-

tem.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-

jure a child in a child restraint system

when the airbags are activated. There is a

risk of injury. Make sure that the front-

seat passenger airbags are deactivated and

that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-

tor light lights up.

Before installing a child restraint system in

the front passenger seat, make sure that the

front, knee and side airbags on the front

passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags

automatically, refer to page 140.

Seat position and height

Before installing a child restraint system,

move the front passenger seat as far back as

possible and adjust its height to the highest

and thus best possible position for the belt

and to offer optimal protection in the event

of an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is

located in front of the belt guide of the child

seat, move the front passenger seat care-

fully forward until the best possible belt

guide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passen-

ger safety belt can be permanently locked to

fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt

1. Pull out the belt strap completely.

2. Secure the child restraint system with

the safety belt.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and

pull it tight against the child restraint

system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt

1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-

pletely.

Seite 87

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

In some cases it may be necessary to sepa-

rate the lower belt attachment. Safety belts,

refer to page 77.

LATCH child restraint fixing

system

General information

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-

dren.

Pay attention to the operating and safety in-

formation from the child restraint system

manufacturer when installing and using

LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCH

anchors

The lower anchors may be used to attach

the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com-

bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg

when the child is restrained by the internal

harnesses.

Safety information

Warning

If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys-

tems are not correctly engaged, the protec-

tive effect of the LATCH child restraint

fixing system can be limited. There is a

risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure

that the lower anchors are securely en-

gaged and that the LATCH child restraint

fixing system fits securely against the

backrest.

Position

Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbol

shows the mounts for the

lower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower

anchors are marked with a

pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.

For vehicles equipped with

a middle seat:

It is not recommended to

use the inner lower anchors

of standard outer LATCH

positions to fasten a child

restraint system on the

middle seat. Use the vehicle

safety belt instead for the

middle seat.

Before installing LATCH child

restraint fixing systems

Pull the safety belt away from the area of

the child restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint

fixing systems

1. Install child restraint system, see manu-

facturer's information.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are

properly engaged.

Seite 88

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Child restraint systems with tether

strap

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly

used for the child restraint system, the

protective effect can be reduced. There is

a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper

retaining strap does not run over sharp

edges and is not twisted as it passes the

upper anchor.

Warning

If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-

tective effect of the child restraint system

is limited or there is none. In certain situa-

tions, for instance braking maneuvers or

in case of an accident, the rear backrest

can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries

or danger to life. Make sure that the rear

backrests are locked.

NOTICE

The anchors for the upper retaining straps

of child restraint systems are only pro-

vided for these retaining straps. When

other objects are mounted, the anchors

can be damaged. There is a risk of damage

to property. Only mount child restraint

systems to the upper anchors.

Anchors

The respective symbol shows the an-

chor for the upper retaining strap.

Seats with an upper top tether are

marked with this symbol. It can be found on

the rear seat backrest or the rear window

shelf.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Seat backrest

6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the anchor

1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.

2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-

ing strap between or along both sides of

the supports of the head restraint to the

anchor.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to

the anchor on the rear seat.

4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it

down.

Seite 89

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Locking the doors and win-

dows

Doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the out-

side only.

Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's

door if children are being trans-

ported in the rear.

This locks various functions so that they

cannot be operated from the rear: safety

switch, refer to page 70.

Seite 90

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Start/Stop button

Concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button

switches the ignition on or off

and starts the engine.

Steptronic transmission: the

engine starts in selector lever

position P or N with the brake pedal pressed

when you press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: the engine starts with

the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/

Stop button is pressed.

Ignition on

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop

button without stepping on the clutch

pedal.

Steptronic transmission: press the Start/

Stop button, but do not press on the brake

pedal at the same time.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in the

instrument cluster light up for a varied

length of time.

To save battery power when the engine is

off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-

sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition off

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop

button again without stepping on the clutch

pedal.

Steptronic transmission: shift to selector

lever position P, press the Start/Stop button

again without stepping on the brake.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster

go out.

To save battery power when the engine is

off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-

sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Safety measures

The ignition is switched off automatically in

the following situations while the vehicle is

stationary and the engine is off:

– When locking the vehicle, even if the

low beams are switched on.

– Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still

be started. This function is only availa-

ble when the low beams are switched

off.

– When opening or closing the driver

door, if the driver's safety belt is un-

buckled and the low beams are switched

off.

– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-

led with driver's door open and low

beams off.

– When the front doors are opened if

there is no other person sitting in the

front seats.

Seite 91

Driving CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– The low beams switch to parking lights

after some minutes of no use.

Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated

selector lever, refer to page 108: when

switching off the ignition, the selector lever

position P is engaged automatically if the

selector lever position R, D or M/S is en-

gaged.

Radio-ready state

General information

In the radio-ready state, certain power con-

sumers remain ready for operation.

Activating

With the engine running, press the Start/

Stop button.

If the engine is not running and the ignition

is switched on: the system automatically ac-

tivates radio-ready state when the door is

opened if the lights are switched off or the

daytime running lights are switched on.

Radio-ready state remains active if, for in-

stance the ignition is automatically

switched off for the following reasons:

– Opening or closing the driver's door.

– Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.

– When automatically switching from low

beams to parking lights.

Switching off automatically

The radio-ready state is switched off auto-

matically in the following situations:

– If the driver's or front passenger door is

opened when exiting the vehicle, with

the engine switched off manually.

– If the ignition is switched off manually

with the Start/Stop button.

– After approx. 8 minutes.

– When the vehicle is locked using the

central locking system.

– Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still

be started.

Starting the engine

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-

tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases

can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust

gases contain pollutants which are color-

less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-

haust gases can also accumulate outside of

the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep

the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient

ventilation.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

In the case of repeated starting attempts

or repeated starting in quick succession,

the fuel is not burned or is inadequately

burned. The catalytic converter can over-

Seite 92

CONTROLS Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

heat. There is a risk of damage to property.

Avoid repeated starting in quick succes-

sion.

Gasoline engine

Depending on the motorization, the full

drive power may not be available for ap-

proximately 30 seconds after starting the

engine. In this case, the vehicle will not ac-

celerate as usual.

Steptronic transmission

Starting the engine

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Engage selector lever position P or N.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a

brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-

gine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to

neutral.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a

brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-

gine starts.

Engine stop

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve-

hicle can cause the vehicle to move and

endanger themselves and traffic, for in-

stance due to the following actions:

– Pressing the Start/Stop button.

– Releasing the parking brake.

– Opening and closing the doors or

windows.

– Engaging selector lever position N.

– Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do

not leave children or animals unattended

in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with

you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

Seite 93

Driving CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Steptronic transmission

Switching off the engine

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply

the parking brake.

2. Engage selector lever position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press

the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Concept

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save

fuel. The system switches off the engine

during a stop, for instance in traffic conges-

tion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains

switched on. The engine starts automati-

cally for driving off.

After each engine start using the Start/Stop

button, the Auto Start/Stop function is

ready and is activated at speeds faster than

about 3 mph/5 km/h.

Depending on the selected driving mode, re-

fer to page 160, the system is automatically

activated or deactivated.

Engine stop

Functional requirements

The engine is switched off automatically

during a stop under the following condi-

tions:

Manual transmission:

– Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal

is not pressed.

– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the

driver's door is closed.

Steptronic transmission:

– The selector lever is in selector lever po-

sition D.

– The brake pedal remains depressed

while the vehicle is stopped.

– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the

driver's door is closed.

In order to be able to release the brake

pedal, engage the selector lever in position

P. The engine remains off.

To continue driving depress the brake

pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine

starts automatically.

The air flow from the air conditioner is re-

duced when the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features: display

The display indicates that the

Auto Start/Stop function is

ready for an Automatic engine

start.

The display indicates that the

conditions for an automatic

engine stop have not been

met.

Seite 94

CONTROLS Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Functional limitations

The engine is not switched off automatically

in the following situations:

– External temperature too low.

– The external temperature is high and au-

tomatic climate control is running.

– The car's interior has not yet been

heated or cooled to the required level.

– The engine is not yet at operating tem-

perature.

– The wheels are at a sharp angle or the

steering wheel is being turned.

– After driving in reverse.

– Fogging of the windows when the auto-

matic climate control is switched on.

– The vehicle battery charge is very low.

– At higher elevations.

– The hood is unlocked.

– The parking assistant is activated.

– Stop-and-go traffic.

– Selector lever in selector lever position

R, N or M/S.

Starting the engine

The engine starts automatically under the

following conditions:

– Manual transmission: clutch pedal is

pressed.

– Steptronic transmission: by releasing

the brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode

After the engine switches off automatically,

it will not start again automatically if any

one of the following conditions are met:

– The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and

the driver's door is open.

– The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a varied

length of time.

The engine can only be started via the

Start/Stop button.

Functional limitations

Even if driving off was not intended, the de-

activated engine starts up automatically in

the following situations:

– Excessive warming of the car's interior

when the air conditioning is switched

on.

– When the steering wheel is turned.

– Steptronic transmission: change from

selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

– Steptronic transmission: change from

selector lever position P to R, N, D or

M/S.

– The vehicle begins rolling.

– Fogging of the windows when the auto-

matic climate control is switched on.

– The vehicle battery charge is very low.

– Excessive cooling of the car's interior

when the heating is switched on.

– Manual transmission: low brake vacuum

pressure; this can occur, for instance if

the brake pedal is depressed a number

of times in succession.

Additional Auto Start/Stop

function

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

country-specific version, the vehicle fea-

tures a variety of sensors for assessing the

traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop func-

tion uses this information to adapt to vari-

ous traffic situations in a proactive manner.

For instance, this applies to the following

situations:

– When a situation is detected in which

the stopping time is expected to be very

short, the engine is not switched off au-

Seite 95

Driving CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

tomatically. A message appears on the

Control Display, depending on the situa-

tion.

– When a situation is detected in which

the vehicle needs to drive off immedi-

ately, the engine is started automati-

cally.

The function may be restricted if the navi-

gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail-

able, for example.

Switching the system on/off

Using the button

Press the button.

– LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function

is deactivated.

The engine is started during an auto-

matic engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped or

started via the Start/Stop button.

– LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function

is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an

automatic engine stop

During an automatic engine stop, the vehi-

cle can be switched off permanently, for in-

stance when leaving it.

Steptronic transmission:

1. Engage selector lever position P.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition

is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop

function is deactivated.

3. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission:

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition

is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop

function is deactivated.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation

In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop

function is deactivated automatically for

safety reasons, for instance if no driver is

detected.

Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer

switches off the engine automatically. A

Check Control message is displayed. It is

possible to continue driving. Have the sys-

tem checked by a dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Parking brake

Concept

The parking brake is used to prevent the ve-

hicle from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

Seite 96

CONTROLS Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve-

hicle can cause the vehicle to move and

endanger themselves and traffic, for in-

stance due to the following actions:

– Pressing the Start/Stop button.

– Releasing the parking brake.

– Opening and closing the doors or

windows.

– Engaging selector lever position N.

– Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do

not leave children or animals unattended

in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with

you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

Parking brake

Setting

With a stationary vehicle

Pull the switch.

The LED lights up.

The indicator light lights up red. The

parking brake is set.

Depending on the stopping situation, the

parking brake is engaged automatically.

Steptronic transmission: in some parking

situations, the parking brake is automati-

cally engaged, when selector lever posi-

tion P is engaged. In these cases, the park-

ing brake is released automatically when

you leave the selector lever position P.

While driving

To use as emergency brake while driving:

Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle

brakes hard while the switch is being

pulled.

The indicator light lights up red, a

signal sounds and the brake lights

light up.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete

stop, the parking brake is engaged.

Releasing

Releasing manually

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Manual transmission: press the

switch while the brake pedal is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: press the

switch while the brake is pressed or se-

lector lever position P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

Seite 97

Driving CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars with

Steptronic transmission

For automatic release, step on the accelera-

tor pedal.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is automatically released

when you step on the accelerator under the

following conditions:

– Engine on.

– Drive mode engaged.

– Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Automatic release in cars with manual

transmission

Drive off as usual. The parking brake disen-

gages when the clutch pedal is released.

The LED and indicator light go out.

Under the following conditions, the parking

brake is automatically released:

– Engine on.

– Gear engaged.

– Driver buckled in and doors closed.

– Engine power is sufficient to drive off.

Malfunction

If the parking brake fails or malfunctions,

secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-

iting.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for

instance with a wheel chock, after exiting

the vehicle.

After a power failure

Re-activating the parking brake

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the switch while stepping on

the brake pedal or selector lever posi-

tion P is set.

It may take several seconds for the brake to

be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as-

sociated with this process are normal.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster goes out as soon as the park-

ing brake is ready for operation.

Turn signal, high beams, head-

light flasher

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its starting

position after actuation. To switch off man-

ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance

point.

Triple turn signal activation

Lightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be ad-

justed.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

Seite 98

CONTROLS Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "One-touch turn signal"

6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently

used.

Signaling briefly

Press the lever to the resistance point and

hold it there for as long as you want the

turn signal to flash.

Malfunction

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator

light indicates that a turn signal bulb has

failed.

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low

beams are switched on.

– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-

row 2.

Wiper system

General information

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is

dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or

cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or

damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Make sure that the vehicle is

switched off when the wipers are in the

folded away state and the wipers are

folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the

wiper motor can overheat when switching

on. There is a risk of damage to property.

Defrost the windshield prior to switching

the wipers on.

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position

is reached.

– Resting position of the wipers, posi-

tion 0.

– Intermittent operation or rain sensor,

position 1.

– Normal wiper speed, position 2.

– Fast wiper speed, position 3.

Seite 99

Driving CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

When travel is interrupted with the wiper

system switched on: when travel continues,

the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

– Switching off: press the lever down until

it reaches its standard position.

– Brief wipe: press the lever down from

the standard position.

The lever automatically returns to its in-

itial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the

time between wipes depending on the in-

tensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, di-

rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-

out the rain sensor, the frequency of the

wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers

can accidentally start moving in vehicle

washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-

erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle

washes.

Activating

Press the lever up once from its standard

position, arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may

not start.

Deactivating

Press the lever back into the standard posi-

tion.

Seite 100

CONTROLS Driving

100

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of

the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-

val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-

sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the

rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the

rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-

dow at low temperatures and obstruct the

view. There is a risk of accident. Only use

the washer systems, if the washer fluid

cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-

freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,

the wash pump cannot work as intended.

There is a risk of damage to property. Do

not use the washer system when the

washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the

windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated

whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on

Turn the outer switch upward.

– Resting position of the wiper, posi-

tion 0.

– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-

verse gear is engaged, the system

switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-

tion.

Seite 101

Driving CONTROLS

101

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– In resting position: turn the switch

downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-

matically returns to its idle position

when released.

– In intermittent mode: turn the switch

further, arrow 2. The switch automati-

cally returns to its interval position

when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer

fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept

The fold-away position enables the wipers

to be folded away from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or

under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or

damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Make sure that the vehicle is

switched off when the wipers are in the

folded away state and the wipers are

folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the

wiper motor can overheat when switching

on. There is a risk of damage to property.

Defrost the windshield prior to switching

the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un-

til the wipers stop in a close to vertical

position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from

the windshield.

Folding down the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the

wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the

windshield.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return

to their resting position and are ready

again for operation.

Seite 102

CONTROLS Driving

102

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Canada: wiper system

General information

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is

dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or

cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or

damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Make sure that the vehicle is

switched off when the wipers are in the

folded away state and the wipers are

folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the

wiper motor can overheat when switching

on. There is a risk of damage to property.

Defrost the windshield prior to switching

the wipers on.

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

ance point.

– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap

once beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its initial

position when released.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

– To switch off from fast wiper speed:

press down twice.

– To switch off from normal wiper speed:

press down once.

– Brief wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its initial

position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the

time between wipes depending on the in-

tensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, di-

rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-

out the rain sensor, the frequency of the

wiper operation is preset.

Seite 103

Driving CONTROLS

103

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers

can accidentally start moving in vehicle

washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-

erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle

washes.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may

not start.

If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen-

sor switched on: if the trip is resumed

within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor

is automatically activated again.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of

the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-

val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-

sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the

rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the

rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-

dow at low temperatures and obstruct the

view. There is a risk of accident. Only use

the washer systems, if the washer fluid

cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-

freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,

the wash pump cannot work as intended.

There is a risk of damage to property. Do

not use the washer system when the

washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Seite 104

CONTROLS Driving

104

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The system sprays washer fluid on the

windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated

whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on

Turn the outer switch upward.

– Resting position of the wiper, posi-

tion 0.

– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-

verse gear is engaged, the system

switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-

tion.

– In resting position: turn the switch

downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-

matically returns to its idle position

when released.

– In intermittent mode: turn the switch

further, arrow 2. The switch automati-

cally returns to its interval position

when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer

fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept

The fold-away position enables the wipers

to be folded away from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or

under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or

damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Make sure that the vehicle is

switched off when the wipers are in the

folded away state and the wipers are

folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the

wiper motor can overheat when switching

on. There is a risk of damage to property.

Defrost the windshield prior to switching

the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press the wiper lever up past the point

of resistance and hold it for approx.

Seite 105

Driving CONTROLS

105

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a

nearly vertical position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from

the windshield.

Folding down the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the

wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the

windshield.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return

to their resting position and are ready

again for operation.

Washer fluid

General information

All washer nozzles are supplied from one

reservoir.

Use a mixture of tap water and windshield

washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield

washer concentrate containing antifreeze

can be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity:

0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

Warning

Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-

ful substances and are flammable. There is

a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow

the instructions on the containers. Keep

antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do

not refill operating materials into different

bottles. Store operating materials out of

reach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-

tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many

individual states; do not exceed the allow-

able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that

apply. Follow the usage instructions on the

washer fluid container.

Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-

centrate or the equivalent is recom-

mended.

Warning

Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on

contact with hot engine parts. There is a

risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-

erty. Only add washer fluid when the en-

gine is cooled down. Next, fully close the

lid of the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washer

fluid for the water-repelling effect on the

windows can lead to damage to the wash-

ing system. There is a risk of damage to

Seite 106

CONTROLS Driving

106

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

property. Do not add silicon-containing ad-

ditives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer con-

centrates or antifreeze can damage the

washing system. There is a risk of damage

to property. Do not mix different wind-

shield washer concentrates or antifreeze.

Follow the information and mixing ratios

provided on the containers.

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the

engine compartment.

Malfunction

The use of undiluted windshield washer

concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can

lead to incorrect readings at temperatures

below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.

Manual transmission

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

When shifting to a lower gear, excessive

speeds can damage the engine. There is a

risk of damage to property. When shifting

into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift

lever to the right.

Schematic diagram

– 1–6: forward gears.

– R: reverse gear.

Shifting

General information

Depending on the engine installation, the

engine speed during a shifting operation is

adjusted automatically as required for har-

monious and dynamic gear shifting.

Seite 107

Driving CONTROLS

107

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear-

shift lever dynamically to the left and en-

gage reverse gear with a forward shifting

movement.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll

without its own power, for instance in a car

wash, or be pushed.

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out

of a forward gear or reverse.

3. Release the parking brake.

Steptronic transmission

Concept

The Steptronic transmission combines the

functions of an automatic transmission with

the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

Selector lever version

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a

transmission with either a latching selector

lever or a tap-operated selector lever is in-

stalled.

Transmission with a latching selector

lever

The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D

are selected by moving the selector lever

into the respective selector lever position.

The selector lever engages in the selector

lever positions.

Transmission with a tap-operated

selector lever

The selector lever positions R, N, and D are

selected by tapping the selector lever for-

Seite 108

CONTROLS Driving

108

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

ward or back. The selector lever automati-

cally returns to the center position when re-

leased.

The selector lever position P is engaged by

pressing the P button on the selector lever

or, in certain situations, automatically, refer

to page 109.

Selector lever positions

Drive mode D

Selector lever position for normal vehicle

operation. All gears for forward travel are

activated automatically.

R is reverse

Engage selector lever position R only when

the vehicle is stationary.

Neutral N

The vehicle may be pushed or roll without

engine power in selector lever position N,

for instance in vehicle washes, refer to

page 111.

Parking position P

General information

Selector lever position, for instance for

parking the vehicle.

The transmission blocks the drive wheels in

selector lever position P.

Engage selector lever position P only when

the vehicle is stationary.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that

selector lever position P is set. Otherwise,

the vehicle may begin to move.

Automatic parking position for a

transmission with a tap-operated selector

lever

Selector lever position P is engaged auto-

matically in situations such as the follow-

ing:

– After the engine is switched off when

the vehicle is in the radio-ready state,

refer to page 92, or when the ignition is

switched off, refer to page 91, while se-

lector lever position R, D or M/S is en-

gaged.

– If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,

the driver's door is opened, and the

brake pedal is not pressed while the ve-

hicle is stationary and selector lever po-

sition D, M/S or R is engaged.

– After the ignition has been switched off

while selector lever position N is en-

gaged.

Engaging selector lever positions:

with a latching selector lever

General information

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after

you select a drive mode, maintain pressure

on the brake pedal until you are ready to

start.

Functional requirements

The selector lever can only be taken out of

selector lever position P if the ignition is on

or the engine is running.

Engaging selector lever position D, N,

R, or P

With the vehicle stationary, depress the

brake pedal before shifting out of selector

lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift

block will not be deactivated and the shift

command will not be executed.

Seite 109

Driving CONTROLS

109

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

A selector lever lock prevents the following

faulty operation:

– Unintentional shifting into selector

lever position P or R.

– Unintentional shifting from selector

lever position P into another selector

lever position.

1. To release the selector lever lock: with

the brake pedal depressed, press the

button on the front of the selector lever.

2. Move the selector lever into the desired

position.

Engaging selector lever positions:

with a tap-operated selector lever

General information

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after

you select a drive mode, maintain pressure

on the brake pedal until you are ready to

start.

Functional requirements

Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it

possible to change from selector lever posi-

tion P to another selector lever position.

Depending on the transmission version, the

engine may have to be running too.

The selection lever position P cannot be

changed until all technical requirements are

met.

Engaging selector lever position D, N,

A selector lever lock prevents the following

faulty operation:

– Unintentional shifting into selector

lever position R.

– Unintentional shifting from selector

lever position P into another selector

lever position.

1. Press and hold the button to release the

selector lever lock.

2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,

briefly push the selector lever in the de-

sired direction, past a resistance point,

if needed. The selector lever automati-

Seite 110

CONTROLS Driving

110

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

cally returns to the center position when

released.

Engaging selector lever position P

Press button P.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General information

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll

without its own power for a short distance,

for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N:

with a latching selector lever

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-

gage selector lever position N.

5. Release brake.

The vehicle can roll.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be

able to change the selector lever position.

Manually unlock the transmission lock, if

needed, refer to page 114.

Engaging selector lever position N:

with a tap-operated selector lever

1. Start the engine while pressing on the

brake pedal.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-

gage selector lever position N.

5. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains

switched on, and a Check Control mes-

sage is displayed.

The vehicle can roll.

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically

engaged when the ignition is switched off.

There is a risk of damage to property. Do

not switch ignition off in vehicle washes.

Irrespective of the ignition, the selector

lever position P is automatically engaged af-

ter approx. 15 minutes.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be

able to change the selector lever position.

Electronically unlock the transmission lock,

if needed, refer to page 114.

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driv-

ing performance. Step on the accelerator

pedal beyond the resistance point at the full

throttle position.

Seite 111

Driving CONTROLS

111

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Sport program M/S

Concept

The shifting points and shifting times in the

Sport program are designed for a sportier

driving style. The transmission, for instance

shifts up later and the shifting times are

shorter.

Activating the Sport program

Press the selector lever to the left from se-

lector lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster, for instance S1.

The sport program of the transmission is ac-

tivated.

Ending the Sport program

Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual mode M/S

Concept

Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual

mode.

Activating manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left from

selector lever position D, arrow 1.

2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward, arrows 2.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and the

gear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting

– To shift down: press the selector lever

forward.

– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-

wards.

The Steptronic transmission continues

shifting automatically in certain situations,

for instance when certain engine speed lim-

its are reached.

With a tap-operated selector lever: when

M2 is set manually while the vehicle is sta-

tionary, the transmission will no longer

shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is

retained until you engage M1 manually or

exit M.

Avoiding automatic upshifting

Once a particular engine speed is attained,

M/S manual mode is automatically up-

shifted as needed.

John Cooper Works: once particular engine

speeds are attained, upshifting is not auto-

matically performed in M/S manual mode.

Seite 112

CONTROLS Driving

112

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmis-

sion, automatic shift operations are not per-

formed if one of the following conditions is

met:

– DSC is deactivated.

– TRACTION is activated.

In addition, there is no downshifting for

kickdown.

With the appropriate transmission version,

the lowest possible gear can be selected by

simultaneously activating kickdown and op-

erating the left shift paddles. This is not

possible by switching briefly via the shift

paddles from selector lever position D to

manual mode M/S.

Ending the manual mode

Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport

transmission

Concept

The shift paddles on the steering wheel al-

low you to shift gears quickly while keeping

both hands on the steering wheel.

General information

Shifting

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate en-

gine and road speeds, for instance down-

shifting is not possible if the engine speed

is too high.

Short-term manual mode

In selector lever position D, actuating a

shift paddle switches into manual mode

temporarily.

After conservative driving in manual mode

without acceleration or shifting via the shift

paddles for a certain amount of time, the

transmission switches back to automatic

mode.

It is possible to switch into automatic mode

as follows:

– Keep the right shift paddle pulled until

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

– In addition to the pulled right shift pad-

dle, pull the left shift paddle.

Continuous manual mode

In selector lever position S, actuating a shift

paddle switches into manual mode perma-

nently.

Shifting

– Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.

– Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.

– Downshifting to the lowest possible

gear: keep the left shift paddle pulled.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the

instrument cluster, followed by the current

gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is

displayed, for example P.

Seite 113

Driving CONTROLS

113

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Releasing the transmission lock

manually: with a latching selector

lever

If the selector lever is locked in selector

lever position P despite the ignition being

switched on, the brake pedal being de-

pressed and the button on the selector lever

being pressed, the transmission lock can be

unlocked manually:

Before unlocking the transmission lock

manually, set the parking brake to prevent

the vehicle from rolling away.

1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, to-

gether with the lower retaining ring,

from the center console. To do so, pull

the retaining ring upward at the rear

edge.

2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connec-

tor, if needed.

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard

vehicle tool kit, refer to page 284, press

the yellow release lever downward, see

arrow.

4. Press the button on the front of the se-

lector lever and move the selector lever

back slightly.

Release the release lever.

5. Bring the selector lever into the desired

position.

For additional information, see the chapter

on tow-starting and towing.

Releasing the transmission lock

electronically: with a tap-operated

selector lever

General information

Electronically unlock the transmission lock

to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.

Before unlocking the transmission lock, set

the parking brake to prevent the vehicle

from rolling away.

Engaging selector lever position N

Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin

the engine.

1. Press and hold down brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter

must audibly start.

3. Press the button on the selector lever,

arrow 1, and press and hold the selector

lever into selector lever position N, ar-

row N, until selector lever position N is

displayed in the instrument cluster.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Seite 114

CONTROLS Driving

114

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

4. Release the selector lever.

5. Release brake, as soon as the starter

stops.

6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger

area and secure it against moving on its

own.

For additional information, see the chapter

on tow-starting and towing.

Steptronic Sport transmission:

Launch Control

Concept

Launch Control enables optimum accelera-

tion on surfaces with good traction under

dry surrounding conditions.

General information

The use of Launch Control causes prema-

ture component wear since this function

represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.

Do not use Launch Control during the

break-in, refer to page 212, period.

Do not turn the steering wheel when driv-

ing away with Launch Control.

Functional requirements

Launch Control is available as soon as the

engine and transmission are at operating

temperature.

Depending on the external temperature and

driving style, the engine and transmission

require an interrupted trip of up to

30 miles/50 km in order to reach the oper-

ating temperature needed for Launch Con-

trol.

Start with launch control

While the engine is running:

1. Press button and select SPORT

with the MINI Driving Modes switch.

The instrument cluster displays TRAC-

TION in combination with SPORT. The

DSC OFF indicator light lights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.

3. With the left foot, forcefully press down

on the brake.

4. Press and hold down the accelerator

pedal beyond the resistance point at the

full throttle position, kickdown.

A flag symbol is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait

briefly until the engine speed is con-

stant. Keep accelerator pedal in this po-

sition.

6. Release the brake within 3 seconds after

the flag symbol illuminates.

The vehicle accelerates.

Upshifting occurs automatically as long

as the flag symbol is displayed and the

accelerator pedal is not released.

Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the

transmission must cool down for approx.

5 minutes before Launch Control can be

used again.

After using Launch Control

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC

Dynamic Stability Control again.

System limits

An experienced driver may be able to ach-

ieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF

mode.

Seite 115

Driving CONTROLS

115

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Displays

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 121

2 Indicator/warning lights

3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 121

5 Display/reset miles 121

6 Electronic displays 117

Seite 116

CONTROLS Displays

116

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, for instance Check Control

Time 122

External temperature 122

Selection lists 126

Total miles/trip odometer 121

Onboard Computer 126

2 Selector lever position 108

Gear shift indicator 124

3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta-

tus 160

Check Control

Concept

The Check Control system monitors func-

tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-

functions in the monitored systems.

General information

A Check Control message is displayed as a

combination of indicator or warning lights

and text messages in the instrument cluster.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-

put and a SMS text message may appear on

the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lights

General information

The indicator/warning lights can light up in

a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper

functioning and light up temporarily when

the engine is started or the ignition is

switched on.

Seite 117

Displays CONTROLS

117

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illumi-

nated: safety belt on the driver or

passenger side is not buckled. The

safety belt reminder can also be activated if

objects are placed on the front passenger

seat.

Make sure that the safety belts are posi-

tioned correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner

may not be working.

Have the vehicle checked immedi-

ately by a dealer's service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, re-

fer to page 97.

Brake system

Braking system impaired. Continue

to drive moderately.

Have the vehicle checked immedi-

ately by a dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or

repair shop.

Approach control warning

Indicator light illuminates: advance

warning is issued, for example when

there is the impending danger of a

collision or the distance to the vehicle

ahead is too small.

Increase the distance.

Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the

imminent danger of a collision when the ve-

hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela-

tively high differential speed.

Intervene by braking or make an evasive

maneuver.

Person warning

If a collision with a detected person

is imminent, the symbol lights up

and a signal sounds.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features: orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selected

distance from the vehicle driving

ahead.

Camera-based cruise control, refer to

page 163.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle

has been detected ahead of you.

Indicator light flashes: the condi-

tions are not adequate for the system to

work.

The system was deactivated but applies the

brakes until the driver actively resumes

control of the vehicle by pressing on the

brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Yellow lights

Antilock Braking System ABS

The Brake Assistant function may

not activate. Avoid abrupt braking.

Take the longer braking distance

into account.

Seite 118

CONTROLS Displays

118

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Have the system immediately checked by a

dealer's service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The indicator light flashes: DSC con-

trols the drive and braking forces.

The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce

speed and modify your driving style to the

driving circumstances.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal-

functioned.

Have the system checked by a dealer's serv-

ice center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

DSC, refer to page 158.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction

Control is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti-

vated.

DSC, refer to page 158, and DTC, re-

fer to page 159.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The FTM signals a loss of tire infla-

tion pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cau-

tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering

maneuvers.

Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 146.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light illuminates: the

Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low

tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.

Follow the information in the Check Control

message.

The indicator light flashes and is then illu-

minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres-

sure losses cannot be detected.

– Interference caused by systems or devi-

ces with the same radio frequency: after

leaving the area of the interference, the

system automatically becomes active

again.

– TPM was unable to complete the reset.

Reset the system again.

– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics

is mounted: have it checked by a deal-

er’s service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop as needed.

– Malfunction: have the system checked

by a dealer’s service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 142.

Steering system

Steering system may not be working.

Have the system checked by a deal-

er's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

Emissions

– The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.

Have the vehicle checked as soon

as possible.

– The warning light flashes under certain

circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive

misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the

system checked immediately; otherwise,

serious engine misfiring within a brief

period can seriously damage emission

control components, in particular the

catalytic converter.

Seite 119

Displays CONTROLS

119

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to

page 283.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indi-

cator light indicates that a turn sig-

nal bulb has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 98.

Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights are

switched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlight

control, refer to page 132.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are switched on.

Front fog lights, refer to page 135.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are switched on and off

automatically depending on the traf-

fic situation.

High-beam Assistant, refer to page 134.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It main-

tains the speed that was set using

the control elements on the steering

wheel.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on.

High beams, refer to page 99.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Continuous display

Some Check Control messages are displayed

continuously and are not cleared until the

malfunction is eliminated. If several mal-

functions occur at once, the messages are

displayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx.

8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-

played again automatically.

Temporary display

Some Check Control messages are hidden

automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The

Check Control messages are stored and can

be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control

messages

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

Seite 120

CONTROLS Displays

120

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the SMS text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control message

is displayed or stored.

SMS text messages

SMS text messages in combination with a

symbol in the instrument cluster explain a

Check Control message and the meaning of

the indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messages

Additional information, such as on the

cause of an error or the required action, can

be called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will

be automatically displayed on the Control

Display.

Depending on the Check Control message,

further help can be selected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the desired text message.

5. Select the desired setting.

Messages after trip completion

Certain messages displayed while driving

are displayed again after the ignition is

switched off.

Fuel gauge

Concept

The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-

played.

General information

Vehicle tilt position may cause the display

to vary.

Information on refueling, refer to page 248.

Instrument cluster without

enhanced features: display

The arrow beside the fuel

pump symbol shows which

side of the vehicle the fuel

filler flap is on.

Indicator light in the instrument

cluster

The yellow indicator light illumi-

nates, once the fuel reserve is

reached.

Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the red

warning field. In this range, the fuel supply

is reduced to protect the engine.

Odometer and trip odometer

Concept

The total mileage driven and the mileage

driven since the last reset are displayed in

the instrument cluster.

Seite 121

Displays CONTROLS

121

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Instrument cluster without

additional functions: reset trip

distance

Press the button.

– The odometer is displayed

when the ignition is

switched off.

– When the ignition is

switched on, the trip od-

ometer is reset.

External temperature

General information

If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig-

nal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃

there can be a risk of icy roads, for in-

stance on bridges or shady sections of the

road. There is a risk of accident. Modify

your driving style to the weather condi-

tions at low temperatures.

Display

The external temperature is

displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Time

The time is displayed in the

instrument cluster.

Set the time on the Central In-

formation Display (CID), refer

to page 42.

Date

The date is displayed in the in-

strument cluster.

Set the date on the Central In-

formation Display (CID), refer

to page 42.

Range

General information

When the remaining range is low:

– A Check Control message is displayed

briefly.

– The remaining range is shown on the

Onboard Computer.

– With a dynamic driving style, for in-

stance fast cornering, the engine func-

tion is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears contin-

uously below a range of approx.

30 miles/50 km.

Seite 122

CONTROLS Displays

122

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than

30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer

have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are

not ensured anymore. There is a risk of

damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Display

The current range is displayed

in the instrument cluster.

Displaying the cruising range

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Range"

Current consumption

Concept

Displays the current fuel consumption.

Check whether you are currently driving in

an efficient and environmentally-friendly

manner.

Displaying the current

consumption

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Current consumption"

Service notifications

Concept

The function displays the service notifica-

tions and the corresponding maintenance

scopes.

General information

After the ignition is switched on the instru-

ment cluster briefly displays available driv-

ing distance or time to the next scheduled

maintenance.

A service advisor can read out the current

service notifications from your vehicle key.

Display

Detailed information on service

notifications

More information on the type of service re-

quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-

play.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Maintenance and service measures and

legally mandated inspections are dis-

played.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor-

mation.

Seite 123

Displays CONTROLS

123

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re-

quired.

The deadline for scheduled

maintenance or a legally

mandated inspection is ap-

proaching.

The service deadline has al-

ready passed.

Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle

inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time

are set correctly.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. "Vehicle inspection"

5. "Date:"

6. Select the desired setting.

Automatic Service Request

Data regarding the service status or legally

mandated vehicle inspections is automati-

cally transmitted to your dealer’s service

center before your vehicle is due for serv-

ice.

You can check when your dealer’s service

center was notified.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Teleservice Call"

Gear shift indicator

Concept

The system recommends the most efficient

gear for the current driving situation.

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

country version, the gear shift indicator is

active in the manual mode of the Steptronic

transmission and with manual transmission.

Suggestions to shift up or down are dis-

played in the instrument cluster.

Manual transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipment

version, shift to a more effi-

cient gear.

Steptronic transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipment

version, shift to a more effi-

cient gear.

Seite 124

CONTROLS Displays

124

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Speed Limit Info

Concept

Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-

mum permitted speed in the instrument

cluster.

General information

The camera at the base of the interior mir-

ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the

road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic

signs with extra symbols for wet road con-

ditions, etc., are also detected and compared

with the vehicle's onboard data, such as

from the rain sensor, and will be displayed

depending on the situation.

Without a navigation system, the system is

subject to limitations imposed by technol-

ogy. Traffic signs with speed limitations are

detected and displayed only. Speed limita-

tions due to entering or exiting towns, high-

way signs, etc. are not displayed. Speed lim-

its with extra text characters are always

displayed.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing visibility and traffic situation.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior

mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior

mirror clean and clear.

Display

Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed

Limit Info is displayed permanently in the

instrument cluster or via the Onboard Com-

puter.

Press button on the turn signal lever several

times, if needed.

Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

Seite 125

Displays CONTROLS

125

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Speed Limit Info

The last speed limit detected.

Without a navigation system

the traffic signals are grayed

out after curves or longer

stretches of roadway.

Without navigation system:

no speed limit or cancellation

is detected.

System limits

The system may not be fully functional and

may provide incorrect information in the

following situations:

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-

fall.

– When traffic signs are fully or partially

concealed by objects, stickers or paint.

– When driving very close to the vehicle

in front of you.

– When driving toward bright lights or

strong reflections.

– When the windshield in front of the in-

terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-

ered by a sticker, etc.

– In the event of incorrect detection by

the camera.

– When passing buses or trucks with a

speed sticker.

– If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

– When traffic signs that are valid for a

parallel road are detected.

– During calibration of the camera imme-

diately after vehicle delivery.

Selection lists

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

buttons on the steering wheel and the dis-

play in the instrument cluster can be used

to display or use the following:

– Current audio source.

– Phone redial.

– Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting the

setting

Button on the

steering wheel

Function

Move selection up.

Move selection

down.

Instrument cluster without

enhanced features: display

Onboard Computer

Concept

The Onboard Computer displays different

vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such

as average values.

Seite 126

CONTROLS Displays

126

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Calling up information

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Information is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Information at a glance

Repeatedly pressing the but-

ton on the turn signal lever

calls up the following informa-

tion:

– Range.

– GREEN Info.

When GREEN Mode is activated.

– Average consumption, fuel.

– Average consumption since delivery

from the factory.

– Current consumption, fuel.

– Average speed.

– Date.

– Engine temperature display.

– Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Speed Limit Info.

– Vehicle speed.

The unit of some information can be

changed.

Setting units, refer to page 43.

Selecting information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you

can select what information from the On-

board Computer can be accessed in the in-

strument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently

used.

Information in detail

Range

Displays the estimated cruising range avail-

able with the remaining fuel.

The range is calculated based on your driv-

ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN info

The achieved range extension may be dis-

played as a bonus range.

Average consumption

The average consumption is calculated for

the period while the engine is running.

The average consumption is calculated for

the distance traveled since the last reset by

the Onboard Computer.

Average speed

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with

the engine manually stopped are not in-

cluded in the calculation of the average

speed.

Seite 127

Displays CONTROLS

127

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Resetting average values

Press and hold the button on the turn signal

lever.

Engine temperature display

Concept

The current engine temperature, based on a

combination of coolant and engine oil tem-

perature is displayed. As soon as the opti-

mum operating temperature has been at-

tained, the indicator is in the center

position.

General information

If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en-

gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes-

sage is displayed too.

When the engine temperature is too

high, a red indicator light is dis-

played.

When the engine oil temperature is

too high, a red indicator light is dis-

played.

To check the coolant level, refer to

page 280.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features: display

Instrument cluster without additional

functions: Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-

mum permitted speed in the instrument

cluster.

Onboard Computer on the Control

Display

Concept

The Onboard Computer displays different

vehicle data on the Control Display, such as

average values.

General information

Two types of Onboard Computers are availa-

ble on the Control Display:

– "Onboard info": average values, such as

the consumption, are displayed. The val-

ues can be reset individually.

– "Trip computer": the values deliver an

overview of a specific route and can be

reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer or

trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Seite 128

CONTROLS Displays

128

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Resetting the Onboard Computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info"

4. "Consumption" or "Speed"

5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Trip computer"

4. Move the Controller to the left, if

needed.

– "Reset": all values are reset.

– "Automatic reset": all values are

reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-

cle has come to a standstill.

5. If necessary, "OK"

Driving Excitement

Concept

On the Control Display, sport instruments

can be displayed, and the vehicle state can

be checked before the use of the SPORT

program.

Sport instruments

General information

On the Control Display, values for power

and torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instruments

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "Sport displays"

4. "Sports instruments"

Via MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Sports instruments"

Speed warning

Concept

A speed limit can be set that when reached

will cause a warning to be issued.

General information

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed

exceeds the set speed limit again, after it

has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Adjusting

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Warning at:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired

speed is displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

Seite 129

Displays CONTROLS

129

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as the

speed warning

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central in-

strument cluster

Concept

The LED ring displays light animations to

represent specific functions.

Basic displays

Basic functions, for instance the tachome-

ter, can be set to be displayed continually if

so desired.

Event displays

Functions that are only displayed tempora-

rily, for instance the volume or temperature

settings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions can

also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-

play corresponds with the displays of the

function in the respective display.

Example: tachometer

Like the tachometer in the instrument clus-

ter, the light animations of the tachometer's

basic display show the current RPMs and

the respective RPM warning thresholds.

Display

– Arrow 1: current RPM.

– Arrow 2: prewarning field.

– Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Basic display" or "Event display"

6. Select the desired setting.

Seite 130

CONTROLS Displays

130

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Setting the brightness

The brightness can be adjusted when night

lighting is active in the instrument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired

brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Vehicle status

General information

The status can be displayed and actions per-

formed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle status

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance

Symbols Description

"Flat Tire Monitor": status of

the run-flat tires, refer to

page 146.

"Tire Pressure Monitor": sta-

tus of the Tire Pressure

Monitor TPM, refer to

page 142.

Symbols Description

"Engine oil level": Electronic

engine oil level check, refer

to page 276.

"Check Control": Check Con-

trol messages are stored in

the background and can be

displayed on the Control

Display. Displaying stored

Check Control messages, re-

fer to page 120.

"Service required": display-

ing service notifications, re-

fer to page 123.

"Teleservice Call": Serv-

ice Request.

Seite 131

Displays CONTROLS

131

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Lights

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Overview

Switches in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next to

the steering wheel.

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Symbol Function

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams and

roadside parking lights

General information

Position of switch: , ,

If the driver's door is opened when the igni-

tion is switched off, the exterior lighting is

automatically switched off.

Parking lights

Position of switch:

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended

periods; otherwise, the battery may become

discharged and it would then be impossible

to start the engine.

Canada: when parking, switch on the one-

sided roadside parking light, refer to

page 133.

Low beams

Position of switch:

The low beams light up when the ignition is

switched on.

Seite 132

CONTROLS Lights

132

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Canada: roadside parking light

Concept

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With radio-ready state switched off, press

the lever either up or down past the resist-

ance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off

Briefly press the lever to the resistance

point in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and pathway

lighting

Welcome lights

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

the ambient brightness, individual light

functions may be switched on briefly when

the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch: ,

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Welcome lights"

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Pathway lighting

General information

The low beams stay illuminated for a partic-

ular time if the high beams are switched on

after radio-ready state is switched off.

Canada: the low beams stay illuminated for

a particular time if the headlight flasher is

switched on after radio-ready state is

switched off.

Setting the duration

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Pathway lighting"

6. Set length of time.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Automatic headlight control

Concept

The low beams are switched on and off au-

tomatically depending on the ambient

brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi-

light or if there is precipitation.

General information

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon

can cause the lights to be switched on.

Seite 133

Lights CONTROLS

133

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Activating

Position of switch:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster

is illuminated when the low beams are

switched on.

System limits

The automatic headlight control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg-

ment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to de-

tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa-

tions, switch the lights on manually.

Daytime running lights

General information

Position of switch: , ,

The daytime running lights light up when

the ignition is switched on. After the igni-

tion is switched off, the parking lights light

up in position .

Activating/deactivating

In some countries, daytime running lights

are mandatory, so it may not be possible to

deactivate the daytime running lights.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the currently used

vehicle key.

Cornering light

General information

Position of switch:

In tight curves, for instance on mountain-

ous roads or when turning, an additional,

cornering light is switched on that lights up

the inside of the curve when the vehicle is

moving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automatically

switched on depending on the steering an-

gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig-

nals.

When driving in reverse, the cornering

lights may be automatically switched on re-

gardless of the steering angle.

Adaptive headlight range con-

trol

The adaptive headlight range control fea-

ture balances out acceleration and braking

processes as well as the vehicle load condi-

tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming

traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.

High-beam Assistant

Concept

The high-beam Assistant detects other traf-

fic participants early on and automatically

switches the high beams on or off depend-

ing on the traffic situation.

General information

The high-beam Assistant ensures that the

high beams are switched on, whenever the

traffic situation allows. In the low speed

range, the high beams are not switched on

by the system.

Seite 134

CONTROLS Lights

134

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The system responds to light from oncom-

ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you,

and to ambient lighting, for instance in

towns and cities.

The high beams can be switched on and off

manually at any time.

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch, depending on the vehicle

equipment: ,

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated when the low

beams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switched

between low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster lights up when the sys-

tem switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivated

when manually switching the high beams

on and off, refer to page 99.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant,

press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits

The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver's personal judg-

ment of when to use the high beams. In sit-

uation that require this, therefore switch off

manually.

The system is not fully functional in the fol-

lowing situations, and driver intervention

may be necessary:

– In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation.

– When detecting poorly-lit road users

such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback

riders and wagons; when driving close

to train or ship traffic; or at animal

crossings.

– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-

sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob-

scured oncoming traffic on highways.

– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the

presence of highly reflective signs.

– When the windshield in front of the in-

terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-

ered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Front fog lights

Concept

The front fog lights work alongside the low

beams to illuminate a wider area of the

roadway.

Functional requirement

The low beams must be switched on before

switching on the front fog lights.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The green indicator light lights up if

the front fog lights are switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to

page 133, is activated, the low beams will

come on automatically when you switch on

the front fog lights.

Seite 135

Lights CONTROLS

135

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

When the high beams or headlight flasher

are activated, the front fog lights are not

switched on.

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement

The parking lights or low beams must be

switched on to adjust the brightness.

Adjusting

Adjust the brightness with the

thumbwheel.

Interior lights

General information

Depending on the equipment, the interior

lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour-

tesy lights are controlled automatically.

The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting

controls brightness of some of these fea-

tures.

Overview

1 Interior lights

2 Reading lights

3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/off

Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button

and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on and

off manually

Press the button.

The reading lights are located in the front

next to the interior light.

Ambient light

General information

Depending on the equipment version, light-

ing can be adjusted for some lights in the

car's interior.

Changing color

Push the switch forward or back:

manual color change.

Press the switch forward or back-

ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds,

until the ambient light illuminates

Seite 136

CONTROLS Lights

136

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

several times: automatic color change. Push

the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the bright-

ness of the ambient light can be adjusted

via the thumbwheel for the instrument

lighting or on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Brightness"

6. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 137

Lights CONTROLS

137

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbag

Front airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and

the front passenger by responding to frontal

impacts in which safety belts alone would

not provide adequate protection.

Side airbag

In the event of a side impact, the side air-

bag protects the side of the body in the

chest and lap area.

Seite 138

CONTROLS Safety

138

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Head airbag

In the event of a side impact, the head air-

bag protects the head.

Ejection Mitigation

The head airbag system is designed as an

ejection mitigation countermeasure to re-

duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle

occupants through side windows during

rollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbag

The knee airbag protects the legs in the

event of a frontal impact.

Protective effect

Airbags are not triggered in every impact

situation, for instance in less severe acci-

dents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of the

airbags

Warning

If the seat position is incorrect or the de-

ployment area of the airbags is impaired,

the airbag system cannot provide protec-

tion as intended and may cause additional

injuries due to triggering. There is a risk

of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in-

formation on achieving the optimum pro-

tective effect of the airbag system.

– Keep a distance from the airbags.

– Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at

the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to

keep the risk of injury to your hands or

arms as low as possible when the airbag

is triggered.

– Make sure that the front passenger is

sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her

feet and legs in the floor area and does

not support them on the dashboard.

– Make sure that occupants keep their

heads away from the side airbag.

– There should be no additional persons,

animals or objects between an airbag

and a person.

– Dashboard and windshield on the front

passenger side must stay clear - do not

attach adhesive labels or coverings and

do not attach brackets or cables, for in-

stance for GPS devices or mobile

phones.

– Do not apply adhesive materials to the

airbag cover panels, do not cover them

or modify them in any way.

– Do not use the cover of the front airbag

on the front passenger side as a storage

area.

– Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions

or other objects to the front passenger

seat that are not specifically suited for

seats with integrated side airbags.

– Do not place seat cushions or other ob-

jects on the front seats that are not spe-

cifically suited for seats with integrated

side airbags.

– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as

jackets, over the backrests.

– Never modify either the individual com-

ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-

tem. This also applies to steering wheel

covers, the dashboard, and the seats.

– Do not remove the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions very

closely, injury from contact with the airbags

cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-

tions.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to

short-term and, in most cases, temporary

hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with dis-

abilities may affect the air bag system; con-

Seite 139

Safety CONTROLS

139

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

tact MINI Customer Relations for further in-

formation.

Warnings and information on the airbags

are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag

system

Safety information

Warning

Individual components can be hot after

triggering of the airbag system. There is a

risk of injury. Do not touch individual

components.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to fail-

ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger-

ing of the airbag system. In the case of a

malfunction, the airbag system might not

trigger as intended despite the accident

severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan-

ger to life. Have the airbag system

checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap-

ped by a dealer’s service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

When the ignition is switched on,

the warning light in the instrument

cluster lights up briefly and thereby

indicates the operational readiness of the

entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning

– Warning light does not come on when

the ignition is switched on.

– The warning light lights up continu-

ously.

Automatic deactivation of the

front-seat passenger airbags

Concept

The system reads if the front passenger seat

is occupied by measuring the human body's

resistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the front

passenger's side are activated or deacti-

vated.

General information

Before transporting a child on the front pas-

senger seat, refer to the safety information

and instructions for children on the front

passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning

To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag

function, the system must be able to de-

tect whether a person is sitting in the

front passenger seat. The entire seat cush-

ion area must be used for this purpose.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Make sure that the front passenger keeps

his or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automatic

deactivation system

When transporting older children and

adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may

be deactivated in certain sitting positions.

In this case, the indicator light for the front-

seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so

that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac-

tivated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags,

have the person sit in the rear.

Seite 140

CONTROLS Safety

140

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

To enable correct recognition of the occu-

pied seat cushion.

– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats

or other items to the front passenger

seat unless they are specifically deter-

mined to be safe for use on the front

passenger seat.

– Do not place any electronic devices on

the front passenger seat if a child re-

straint system is to be installed on it.

– Do not place objects under the seat that

could press against the seat from below.

– No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front-seat

passenger airbags

The indicator light for the front-seat passen-

ger airbags indicates the operating state of

the front-seat passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags are

either activated or deactivated.

– The indicator light lights

up when a child is properly

seated in a child restraint

system or when the seat is

empty. The airbags on the

front passenger side are

not activated.

– The indicator light does not light up

when, for instance a correctly seated

person of sufficient size is detected on

the seat. The airbags on the front pas-

senger side are activated.

Detected child restraint systems

The system generally detects children

seated in a child restraint system, particu-

larly in child restraint systems required by

NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-

cle was manufactured. After installing a

child restraint system, make sure that the

indicator light for the front-seat passenger

airbags lights up. This indicates that the

child restraint system has been detected

and the front-seat passenger airbags are not

activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-

seat passenger airbag

The explosive power that activates driver's/

front-seat passenger airbags very much de-

pends on the positions of the driver's/front

passenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this function

over the long-term, calibrate the front seats

as soon as a relevant Check Control mes-

sage is displayed.

Calibrating the front seats

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. Make sure that the

area of movement of the seat is clear prior

to any adjustment.

An appropriate Check Control message is

displayed.

1. Move the respective seat all the way for-

ward.

2. Move the respective seat forward again.

The seat moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-

tion.

Seite 141

Safety CONTROLS

141

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The calibration procedure is completed

when the Check Control message disap-

pears.

If the message continues to be displayed,

repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a re-

peat calibration, have the system checked

as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Concept

The system monitors tire inflation pressure

in the four mounted tires. The system warns

you if there is a significant loss of pressure

in one or more tires.

General information

Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire

inflation pressure and, depending on the

model, the tire temperature.

Further information and instructions on us-

ing the system can also be found under Tire

inflation pressure, refer to page 252.

Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for

the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a

loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re-

set was performed with the correct tire

inflation pressure.

– After the tire inflation pressure was ad-

justed to a new value, a reset was per-

formed.

– Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current status

The system status can be displayed on the

Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-

tem is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Additional information

The current tire inflation pressures are dis-

played too. The values shown are instanta-

neous measurements and may vary depend-

ing on driving style or weather conditions.

Resetting the system

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform

reset".

6. Drive away.

The following is displayed: "Resetting Tire

Pressure Monitor…".

After a travel time of several minutes, the

set tire inflation pressures are accepted as

reference values. The resetting process is

completed automatically while driving.

After a successfully completed reset, the fol-

lowing is displayed: "Tire Pressure Monitor

active. See label for recommended

pressures.".

Seite 142

CONTROLS Safety

142

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

You may interrupt this trip at any time.

When you continue the reset resumes auto-

matically.

Messages

General information

A low tire inflation pressure may cause the

DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be

switched on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss-

ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-

dling, such as steering and braking re-

sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited

stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not

continue driving if the vehicle is equipped

with normal tires. Follow the information

on run-flat tires and continued driving

with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is

required

Message

A symbol with a Check Control message ap-

pears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

The system has detected a

wheel change, but no reset was

done.

No reset was performed for the

system. The system issues a

warning based on the tire infla-

tion pressures stored during the

last reset.

Inflation was not carried out ac-

cording to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure has

fallen below the level of the last

reset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct as

needed.

2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated

in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control

message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a tire inflation pressure

loss.

No reset was performed for the

system. The system issues a

warning based on the tire infla-

tion pressures stored during the

last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moder-

ately. Do not exceed a speed of

80 mph/130 km/h.

Seite 143

Safety CONTROLS

143

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas

station, check and correct the tire infla-

tion pressure in all four tires, if neces-

sary.

3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tire

inflation pressure

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated

in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with the affected tire

appears in a Check Control message on the

Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major

loss in tire inflation pressure.

No reset was performed for the

system. The system issues a

warning based on the tire infla-

tion pressures stored during the

last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-

neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with

normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 261, are la-

beled with a circular symbol containing

the letters RSC marked on the tire's

sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres-

sure in all four tires, for instance using

the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-

tor may not have been reset. In this

case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

may not have been initialized. In this

case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is

not possible, please contact a dealer’s

service center or another qualified serv-

ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire

kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire

kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.

In this case, have the electronics checked

and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a

run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire

pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-

ity when braking, braking distances are

longer and the self-steering properties will

change. There is a risk of accident. Drive

moderately and do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged

tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Seite 144

CONTROLS Safety

144

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-

neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all

four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-

tor may not have been reset. In this

case, perform the reset.

Possible driving range with a

depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to

drive safely varies depending on how the

vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road

conditions, external temperature. The driv-

ing range may be less but may also be more

if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average

weight and used under favorable conditions,

the distance for which it may be safe to

drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will

handle differently, potentially leading to

conditions such as the following:

– Greater likelihood of swerving off

course.

– Longer braking distances.

– Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt

steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-

cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can

indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of

the tire could come loose and cause an acci-

dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

System limits

Temperature

The tire inflation pressure depends on the

tire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increase

the tire's temperature, thus increasing the

tire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced when

the tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warning

when temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure loss

The system cannot indicate sudden serious

tire damage caused by external circumstan-

ces.

Failure performing a reset

The system does not function properly if a

reset has not been carried out, for instance

a flat tire is reported though tire inflation

pressures are correct.

Malfunction

The yellow warning light flashes and

is then illuminated continuously. A

Check Control message is displayed.

It may not be possible to identify tire pres-

sure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the fol-

lowing situations:

– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics,

for instance an emergency wheel, is

mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s

Seite 145

Safety CONTROLS

145

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

service center or another qualified serv-

ice center or repair shop as needed.

– Malfunction: have system checked by a

dealer’s service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

– The system was unable to complete the

reset. Perform a system reset again.

– Interference caused by systems or devi-

ces with the same radio frequency: after

leaving the area of the interference, the

system automatically becomes active

again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/

FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring

System

Each tire, including the spare (if provided)

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-

bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.) As an added safety

feature, your vehicle has been equipped

with a tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,

when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires

as soon as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-

tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-

dling and stopping ability. Please note that

the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even

if under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been

equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-

tor to indicate when the system is not oper-

ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-

cator is combined with the low tire pressure

telltale. When the system detects a mal-

function, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain contin-

uously illuminated. This sequence will

continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups

as long as the malfunction exists. When the

malfunction indicator is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or signal

low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-

functions may occur for a variety of rea-

sons, including the installation of replace-

ment or alternate tires or wheels on the

vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-

tioning properly. Always check the TPMS

malfunction telltale after replacing one or

more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-

sure that the replacement or alternate tires

and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

Concept

The system detects tire inflation pressure

loss on the basis of rotation speed differen-

ces between the individual wheels while

driving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss,

the diameter and therefore the rotational

speed of the corresponding wheel changes.

The difference will be detected and reported

as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual in-

flation pressure in the tires.

Seite 146

CONTROLS Safety

146

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for

the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a

loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini-

tialization was performed with the cor-

rect tire inflation pressure.

– After the tire pressure was adjusted to a

new value, an initialization was per-

formed.

Status display

The current status of the flat tire monitor

can be displayed, for instance whether the

RPA is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization required

An initialization must be performed in the

following situations:

– After the tire inflation pressure has

been adjusted.

– After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initialization

When initializing, the set tire inflation

pressures serve as reference values in order

to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started

by confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving

with snow chains.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with: "Perform

reset".

6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driv-

ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues

when driving resumes.

Messages

General information

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic

Stability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss-

ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-

dling, such as steering and braking re-

sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited

stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not

continue driving if the vehicle is equipped

with normal tires. Follow the information

on run-flat tires and continued driving

with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire

A yellow warning light is illuminated

in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control

message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major

loss in tire inflation pressure.

Seite 147

Safety CONTROLS

147

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-

neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with

normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 261, are la-

beled with a circular symbol containing

the letters RSC marked on the tire's

sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres-

sure in all four tires, for instance using

the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-

tor may not have been reset. In this

case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

may not have been initialized. In this

case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is

not possible, please contact a dealer’s

service center or another qualified serv-

ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire

kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire

kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.

In this case, have the electronics checked

and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a

run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire

pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-

ity when braking, braking distances are

longer and the self-steering properties will

change. There is a risk of accident. Drive

moderately and do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged

tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-

neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all

four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

may not have been initialized. In this

case, initialize the system.

Possible driving range with a

depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to

drive safely varies depending on how the

vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road

conditions, external temperature. The driv-

ing range may be less but may also be more

if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average

weight and used under favorable conditions,

Seite 148

CONTROLS Safety

148

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

the distance for which it may be safe to

drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will

handle differently, potentially leading to

conditions such as the following:

– Greater likelihood of swerving off

course.

– Longer braking distances.

– Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt

steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-

cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can

indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of

the tire could come loose and cause an acci-

dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

System limits

The system could be delayed or malfunction

in the following situations:

– A natural, even tire inflation pressure

loss in all four tires will not be recog-

nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation

pressure regularly.

– Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external circumstances cannot be recog-

nized in advance.

– When the system has not been initial-

ized.

– When driving on a snowy or slippery

road surface.

– Sporty driving style: spinning traction

wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-

ing).

– When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety

Concept

Intelligent Safety enables central operation

of the driver assistance systems.

The intelligent safety systems can help pre-

vent an imminent collision.

– Approach control warning with City

light braking function, refer to

page 150.

– Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation,

refer to page 153.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing visibility and traffic situation.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver’s personal judg-

ment. Due to its limits, the system may not

issue warnings or reactions, or these may

be issued late or in a manner that is not

consistent with their normal use. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Seite 149

Safety CONTROLS

149

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions

can malfunction during tow-starting/

towing with the Intelligent Safety systems

activated. There is a risk of accident.

Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off

prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off

Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto-

matically active after every departure. Some

Intelligent Safety systems activate accord-

ing to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

– The menu for the Intelligent

Safety system is displayed. The

systems are individually

switched off according to their

respective settings.

– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-

tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-

ual settings are stored for the driver profile

currently in use.

Press button again:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched on.

– The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched off.

– The LED goes out.

Approach control warning

with city light braking func-

tion

Concept

The system may prevent some accidents. In

the event of an accident, the system may re-

duce impact speed.

The system sounds a warning before an im-

minent collision and activates brakes inde-

pendently, if needed.

The Brake Assistant function activates and

applies the brakes with limited force and

duration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirror

controls the system.

The approach control warning is available

even if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehi-

cle intentionally, the approach control warn-

ing and braking are delayed in order to

avoid false system reactions.

General information

The system warns at two levels of an immi-

nent danger of collision at speeds from ap-

prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn-

ings may vary with the current driving

situation.

Seite 150

CONTROLS Safety

150

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Braking is performed at speeds up to ap-

proximately 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Objects that the system can detect are

taken into account.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing visibility and traffic situation.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver’s personal judg-

ment. Due to its limits, the system may not

issue warnings or reactions, or these may

be issued late or in a manner that is not

consistent with their normal use. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions

can malfunction during tow-starting/

towing with the Intelligent Safety systems

activated. There is a risk of accident.

Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off

prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior

mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior

mirror clean and clear.

Seite 151

Safety CONTROLS

151

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after ev-

ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

– The menu for the Intelligent

Safety system is displayed. The

systems are individually

switched off according to their

respective settings.

– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-

tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-

ual settings are stored for the driver profile

currently in use.

Press button again:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched on.

– The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched off.

– The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via the Central

Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Intelligent Safety"

4. "Warning time"

5. Select the desired setting.

The selected warning time is stored for the

driver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a vehicle detected in this

way is imminent, a warning symbol appears

on the instrument cluster.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarn-

ing.

Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and an

acoustic signal sounds: acute

warning.

Brake and make an evasive ma-

neuver, if necessary.

Prewarning

This warning is provided, for instance when

there is impending danger of a collision or

the distance to the vehicle ahead is too

small.

If a prewarning is provided, respond by

braking as warranted.

Acute warning with braking function

An acute warning is displayed when there

is an imminent danger of collision due to

the vehicle approaching another object at a

high speed.

The driver must intervene actively when

there is an acute warning. If necessary, the

driver is assisted by a minor automatic

braking intervention in a possible risk of

collision.

Acute warnings may be provided even when

there has been no prior warning.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver to inter-

vene. During a warning, the maximum brak-

ing force is used. In order to activate the

Seite 152

CONTROLS Safety

152

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Brake Assistant function, you must apply

the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is

a risk of collision, the system may assist

with braking. When the vehicle is traveling

at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a

complete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking in-

tervention up to a complete stop, the engine

may be shut down.

The driver may interrupt the braking inter-

vention function by stepping on the acceler-

ator pedal or by actively moving the steer-

ing wheel.

The system’s ability to detect objects may

be limited in some circumstances. Refer to

the information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the limitations of the system and

actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer-

tain conditions and circumstances. Due to

conditions or other factors, the system

may not respond. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the

information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the scope of the system’s opera-

tion and limitations.

Detection range

The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come or

might come late.

The following situations may not be de-

tected, for example:

– Slow moving vehicles when you ap-

proach them at high speed.

– Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front

of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

– Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-

ance.

– Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in

the following situations:

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-

fall.

– In tight curves.

– If the field of view of the camera or the

windshield is dirty or covered.

– If the driving stability control systems

are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the

engine via the Start/Stop button.

– During calibration of the camera imme-

diately after vehicle delivery.

– If there are constant blinding effects be-

cause of oncoming light, for instance

from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings

are, the more warnings are displayed.

Therefore, there may also be an excess of

premature or unjustified warnings and reac-

tions.

Daytime pedestrian collision

mitigation

Concept

The system may prevent some accidents

with pedestrians.

When driving at city speeds, the system

will issue a warning if there is imminent

Seite 153

Safety CONTROLS

153

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup-

port this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mir-

ror controls the system.

General information

In sufficiently bright conditions, the system

issues a warning of a possible risk of colli-

sion with pedestrians in the speed range

from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.

35 mph/60 km/h

The system reacts to people who are within

the detection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is

divided into two areas:

– Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of

the vehicle.

– Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-

cated within the central area. A warning is

issued about pedestrians who are located

within the extended area only if they are

moving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing visibility and traffic situation.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver’s personal judg-

ment. Due to its limits, the system may not

issue warnings or reactions, or these may

be issued late or in a manner that is not

consistent with their normal use. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions

can malfunction during tow-starting/

towing with the Intelligent Safety systems

activated. There is a risk of accident.

Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off

prior to tow-starting/towing.

Seite 154

CONTROLS Safety

154

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior

mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior

mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after ev-

ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

– The menu for the Intelligent

Safety system is displayed. The

systems are individually

switched off according to their

respective settings.

– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-

tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-

ual settings are stored for the driver profile

currently in use.

Press button again:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched on.

– The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched off.

– The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a person detected in this

way is imminent, a warning symbol appears

on the instrument cluster.

The red symbol is displayed and a

signal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or

make an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver to inter-

vene. During a warning, the maximum brak-

ing force is used. In order to activate the

Brake Assistant function, you must apply

the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is

a risk of collision, the system may assist

with braking. When the vehicle is traveling

at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a

complete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking in-

tervention up to a complete stop, the engine

may be shut down.

Seite 155

Safety CONTROLS

155

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The driver may interrupt the braking inter-

vention function by stepping on the acceler-

ator pedal or by actively moving the steer-

ing wheel.

The system’s ability to detect objects may

be limited in some circumstances. Refer to

the information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the limitations of the system and

actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer-

tain conditions and circumstances. Due to

conditions or other factors, the system

may not respond. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the

information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the scope of the system’s opera-

tion and limitations.

Detection range

The detection potential of the camera is lim-

ited.

Thus, a warning might not be issued or be

issued late.

The following situations may not be de-

tected, for example:

– Partially covered pedestrians.

– Pedestrians that are not detected as

such because of the viewing angle or

contour.

– Pedestrians outside of the detection

range.

– Pedestrians having a body size less than

32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional or

may not be available in the following situa-

tions:

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-

fall.

– In tight curves.

– If the field of view of the camera or the

windshield is dirty or covered.

– If the driving stability control systems

are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the

engine via the Start/Stop button.

– During calibration of the camera imme-

diately after vehicle delivery.

– If there are constant blinding effects be-

cause of oncoming light, for instance

from the sun low in the sky.

– When it is dark outside.

Brake force display

Concept

Additional brake lights indicate emergency

braking to the traffic behind. This can re-

duce the risk of a rear-end collision.

General information

– During normal brake application, the

brake lights light up.

Seite 156

CONTROLS Safety

156

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– During heavy brake application, the

flashers additionally light up.

PostCrash – iBrake

Concept

In the event of an accident, the system can

bring the vehicle to a halt automatically

without intervention by the driver in cer-

tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a

further collision and the consequences

thereof.

At standstill

After coming to a halt, the brake is released

automatically. Secure the vehicle against

rolling.

Harder vehicle braking

In certain situations, it can be necessary to

bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than

the Brake Assistant allows.

To do this, quickly apply extra force to the

brake. For a brief period, the braking pres-

sure will be higher than the braking pres-

sure that is achieved by the automatic brak-

ing function. This interrupts automatic

braking.

Interrupting automatic braking

It can be necessary to interrupt automatic

braking in certain situations, for instance

for an evasive maneuver.

Interrupt automatic braking:

– By pressing the brake pedal.

– By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Seite 157

Safety CONTROLS

157

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Antilock Braking System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during

braking.

The vehicle maintains its steering power

even during full brake applications, which

increases the active safety.

ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys-

tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak-

ing capability to the furthest possible ex-

tent. It reduces the braking distance to a

minimum during an emergency stop. This

system utilizes all of the capabilities pro-

vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake

pedal for the duration of the emergency

stop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Concept

Within the physical limits, the system helps

to keep the vehicle on a steady course by

reducing engine speed and by applying

brakes to the individual wheels.

General information

DSC detects the following unstable driving

conditions, for instance:

– Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-

ing.

– Loss of traction of the front wheels,

which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to

page 159, is a version of the DSC where for-

ward momentum is optimized.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic conditions. Based on

the limits of the system, it cannot inde-

pendently react to all traffic situations.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Warning

When driving with a roof load, for in-

stance with roof-mounted luggage rack,

the vehicle's center of gravity is higher,

which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-

ping in critical driving situations. There

Seite 158

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

158

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

may be a risk of accident or risk of damage

to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy-

namic Stability Control when driving with

roof load.

Indicator/warning lights

The indicator light flashes: DSC con-

trols the drive and braking forces.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has

malfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General information

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability

is reduced during acceleration and when

driving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC

again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but not

longer than approx. 10 seconds, un-

til the indicator light for DSC OFF

lights up in the instrument cluster and dis-

plays DSC OFF.

DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC

Press the button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

light go out.

Indicator/warning lights

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-

played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC is

deactivated.

Automatic activation

When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-

tion occurs in the following situations:

– The vehicle has a flat tire.

– When activating cruise control in the

TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.

DTC Dynamic Traction Con-

trol

Concept

DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-

ity Control where forward momentum is op-

timized.

The system ensures maximum headway on

special road conditions, for instance unp-

lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces,

but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.

When DTC is activated, the vehicle has

maximum traction. Driving stability is lim-

ited during acceleration and when driving

in curves.

Drive carefully.

You may find it useful to briefly activate

DTC under the following special circum-

stances:

– When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads.

– When driving off from deep snow or

loose ground.

– When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC

Dynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press the button.

Seite 159

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

159

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument

cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF

lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-

tor light go out.

Performance Control

Performance Control enhances the agility of

the vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, wheels are

braked individually when a sporty driving

style is used.

ALL4

ALL4 is the all-wheel-drive system of your

vehicle. Concerted action by ALL4 and DSC

Dynamic Stability Control further optimizes

traction and driving dynamics. The ALL4

all-wheel-drive system variably distributes

the driving forces to the front and rear axles

as demanded by the driving situation and

road surface.

Adaptive chassis

Concept

The tuning of the suspension can be

changed with the system.

The system offers several different pro-

grams.

The programs are selected via the MINI

Driving Modes switch.

Programs

MID/GREEN

Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for

more comfort.

SPORT

Consistently sporty tuning of the shock ab-

sorbers for greater driving agility.

MINI Driving Modes switch

Concept

The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to

fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.

Choose between three different programs.

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch

will activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

Switch Program

SPORT

MID

GREEN

MID

MID provides balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is acti-

vated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

Concept

GREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi-

mize range.

Seite 160

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

160

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Activating GREEN

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch

downward until GREEN is displayed in the

instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved when

GREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure GREEN"

5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when

GREEN is activated.

SPORT

Concept

Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain

for greater driving agility.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

tuning of the chassis and suspension also

changes and SPORT can be individually

configured.

The configuration is stored for the driver

profile currently in use.

Activating SPORT

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up-

ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

Configuring SPORT

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure SPORT"

5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when SPORT

is activated.

Configuring driving program

Settings can be made for the following driv-

ing programs in Driving mode:

– GREEN, refer to page 160.

– SPORT, refer to page 161.

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the MINI Driving

Modes switch displays a list of

programs, which can be se-

lected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster dis-

plays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

Concept

This system supports driving off on uphill

grades. The parking brake is not required.

Seite 161

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

161

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driving off with the drive-off

assistant

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive off

without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle

is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent power

steering function.

The system provides the steering force with

more support at low speeds than at higher

ones. This makes it easier to park, for in-

stance, and makes steering firmer when

driving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-

cording to the driving program, so that a

firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering

response is conveyed.

Seite 162

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

162

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Camera-based cruise control

Concept

Using this system, a desired speed and a

distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted

using the buttons on the steering wheel.

The system maintains the desired speed on

clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or

brakes automatically.

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys-

tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so

that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is

maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as

the given situation allows.

The distance can be adjusted in several

steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the

respective speed.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic

transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you

brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive

again shortly thereafter, the system is able

to detect this within the given system lim-

its.

General information

A camera on the interior mirror is used to

detect vehicles driving ahead.

Depending on the settings, the characteris-

tics of cruise control many change in cer-

tain ranges.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic conditions. Based on

the limits of the system, it cannot inde-

pendently react to all traffic situations.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Warning

The desired speed can be incorrectly ad-

justed or called up by mistake. There is a

risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed

to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Warning

Risk of accident due to too high speed dif-

ferences to other vehicles, for instance in

the following situations:

– When fast approaching a slowly mov-

ing vehicle.

– Vehicle suddenly swerving into own

lane.

Seite 163

Driving comfort CONTROLS

163

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– When fast approaching standing ve-

hicles.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Watch traffic closely and actively inter-

vene where appropriate.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to

page 165.

Store/maintain speed, refer to

page 165.

Pause cruise control, refer to

page 165.

Continue cruise control with the

last setting, refer to page 166.

Reduce distance, refer to

page 166.

Increase the distance, refer to

page 166.

Button Function

Increase speed, refer to

page 165.

Reduce speed, refer to page 165.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's

series, optional features and country speci-

fications.

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior

mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior

mirror clean and clear.

Functional requirements

Speed range

The system is best used on well-constructed

roads.

The system is functional at speeds begin-

ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic

transmissions: the system can also be acti-

vated while the vehicle is stationary.

The max. speed that can be set is

85 mph/140 km/h.

Manual transmission: Active Cruise Control

is interrupted below a speed of approx.

20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not

brake to a stop.

Seite 164

CONTROLS Driving comfort

164

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Switching on/off and interrupting

cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Display in the instrument cluster

lights up.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Display in the instrument cluster

lights up. The current speed is adopted as

desired speed and displayed with symbol.

Cruise control is active and maintains the

set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched

on, if necessary.

Switching off

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic

transmissions: when switching off while

stationary, depress the brake pedal simulta-

neously.

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired

speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic

transmissions: when interrupting while sta-

tionary, depress the brake pedal simultane-

ously.

Interrupting automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in

the following situations:

– When the driver applies the brakes.

– Manual transmission: when the clutch

pedal is depressed for a few seconds or

released while a gear is not engaged.

– If selector lever position N is set.

– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-

vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control

is deactivated.

– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-

venes.

– If the detection range of the camera is

impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy

precipitation or glare effects from the

sun.

– Manual transmission: if the vehicle in

front decelerates below a speed of ap-

prox. 20 mph/30 km/h.

– With the Stop&Go function for Step-

tronic transmissions: following a sta-

tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, af-

ter the vehicle was braked to a stop by

the system.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press or button in the interrupted

state.

When the system is switched on, the cur-

rent speed is maintained and stored as the

desired speed.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

The stored speed is displayed by the

symbol in the Info Display of the instrument

cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched

on, if necessary.

Seite 165

Driving comfort CONTROLS

165

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed

or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and

the vehicle reaches the stored speed when

the road is clear.

– or button: each time it is pressed

to the point of resistance, the desired

speed increases or decreases by approx.

1 mph/1 km/h.

– or button: each time it is pressed

past the resistance point, the desired

speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/

10 km/h.

or button: hold down to repeat the

action.

Adjusting the distance

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to

the system limits, braking can be late.

There may be a risk of accident or risk of

damage to property. Be aware to the traffic

situation at all times. Adjust the distance

to the traffic and weather conditions and

maintain the prescribed safety distance,

possibly by braking.

Reduce distance

Press the button repeatedly until

the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

The set distance is briefly displayed

in the left part of the Info Display of the in-

strument cluster.

Increase the distance

Press the button repeatedly until

the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

The set distance is briefly displayed

in the left part of the Info Display of the in-

strument cluster.

Continuing cruise control

General information

An interrupted cruise control can be contin-

ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur-

rent speed and stored speed is not too large

before calling up the stored speed. Other-

wise, unintentional braking or accelerating

may occur.

In the following cases, the stored speed

value is deleted and cannot be called up

again:

– When the system is switched off.

– When the ignition is switched off.

Calling up the stored speed and

distance

Press the button with the system in-

terrupted. Cruise control is contin-

ued with the stored values. The in-

strument cluster briefly displays the

selected distance.

Seite 166

CONTROLS Driving comfort

166

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Switching distance control on/off

Safety information

Warning

The system does not react to traffic driv-

ing ahead of you, but instead maintains

the stored speed. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Ad-

just the desired speed to the traffic condi-

tions and brake as needed.

Switching distance control off

Distance control can be switched off and on

when driving with cruise control activated.

Press and hold this button.

Or:

Press and hold this button.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster lights up.

To switch distance control back on, press

one of the two buttons again briefly.

After changing over distance control, a

Check Control message is displayed.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

In addition to the indicator light, the

desired speed is displayed in the Info Dis-

play.

– Display lights up green: system is active,

the display indicates the desired speed.

– Display lights up orange: system is in-

terrupted, the display indicates the

stored speed.

– No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that

the conditions necessary for operation are

not currently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set automatically af-

ter the system is switched on.

Instrument clusters without enhanced fea-

tures: selected distance from the vehicle

driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left

hand portion of the Info Display.

Detected vehicle

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Symbol lights up orange: a vehicle

has been detected ahead of you.

With the Stop&Go function for Step-

tronic transmissions:

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle

has driven away.

ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti-

vate ACC as follows:

Seite 167

Driving comfort CONTROLS

167

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– By briefly pressing the accelerator

pedal.

– By pressing the RES CNCL button.

– By pressing the or button.

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Symbol flashes orange.

The conditions are not adequate for the sys-

tem to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the

brakes until you actively resume control by

pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator

pedal.

Symbol flashes red and a signal

sounds:

Brake and make an evasive maneu-

ver, if necessary.

System interrupted without detected

vehicle.

System interrupted with detected ve-

hicle.

System limits

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and

the automatic braking capacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might

not be detected.

Deceleration

The system does not decelerate in the fol-

lowing situations:

– For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly

slow-moving road users.

– For red traffic lights.

– For cross traffic.

– For oncoming traffic.

– Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-

ing lighting at night.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not de-

tected until it is completely within the same

lane as your vehicle.

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

swerves into your lane, the system may not

be able to automatically restore the selected

distance. It may not be possible to restore

the selected distance in certain situations,

including if you are driving significantly

faster than vehicles driving ahead of you,

for instance when rapidly approaching a

truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you

is reliably detected, the system requests

that the driver intervene by braking and

carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

Seite 168

CONTROLS Driving comfort

168

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

With the Stop&Go function for

Steptronic transmissions: driving off

In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive

off automatically; for example:

– On steep uphill grades.

– In front of bumps in the road.

In these cases, press on the accelerator

pedal.

Cornering

When the desired speed is too high for a

curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Be-

cause curves may not be anticipated in ad-

vance, drive into a curve at an appropriate

speed.

The system has a limited detection range.

Situations can arise in tight curves where a

vehicle driving ahead will not be detected

or will be detected very late.

When you approach a curve the system may

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due

to the bend of the curve. If the system de-

celerates you may compensate it by briefly

accelerating. After releasing the accelerator

pedal the system is reactivated and controls

speed independently.

Weather

The following restrictions can occur under

unfavorable weather or light conditions:

– Poorer vehicle recognition.

– Short-term interruptions for vehicles

that are already recognized.

Examples of unfavorable weather or light

conditions:

– Wet conditions.

– Snowfall.

– Slush.

– Fog.

– Glare.

Drive attentively, and react to the current

traffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac-

tively, for instance by braking, steering or

evading.

Engine power

The desired speed may not be maintained

on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi-

cient.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed if the

system fails or was automatically deacti-

vated.

The system may not be fully functional in

the following situations:

– When an object was not correctly de-

tected.

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-

fall.

– In tight curves.

– If the field of view of the camera or the

windshield is dirty or covered.

– When driving toward bright lights.

Seite 169

Driving comfort CONTROLS

169

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– Up to 20 seconds after the start of the

engine, via the Start/Stop button.

– During calibration of the camera imme-

diately after vehicle delivery.

Cruise control

Concept

Using this system, a desired speed can be

adjusted using the buttons on the steering

wheel. The system maintains the desired

speed. The system accelerates and brakes

automatically as needed.

General information

The system is functional at speeds begin-

ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the settings, the cruise con-

trol settings many change under certain

conditions.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic conditions. Based on

the limits of the system, it cannot inde-

pendently react to all traffic situations.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Warning

The use of the system can lead to an in-

creased risk of accidents in the following

situations, for instance:

– On winding roads.

– In heavy traffic.

– On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or

wet conditions, or on a loose road

surface.

There may be a risk of accident or risk of

damage to property. Only use the system if

driving at constant speed is possible.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to

page 170.

Store speed, refer to page 171.

Pause cruise control, refer to

page 170.

Continue cruise control with the

last setting, refer to page 171.

Increase speed, refer to

page 171.

Reduce speed, refer to page 171.

Switching on/off and interrupting

cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster lights up.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Seite 170

CONTROLS Driving comfort

170

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The current speed is adopted as the desired

speed and is displayed with the symbol in

the instrument cluster.

Cruise control is active and maintains the

set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched

on, if necessary.

Switching off

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired

speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button on

the steering wheel.

Interrupting automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in

the following situations:

– When the driver applies the brakes.

– If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few

seconds or released while a gear is not

engaged.

– If the gear engaged is too high for the

current speed.

– If selector lever position N is set.

– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-

vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control

is deactivated.

– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-

venes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press or button in the interrupted

state.

When the system is switched on, the cur-

rent speed is maintained and stored as the

desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched

on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed

or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and

the vehicle reaches the stored speed when

the road is clear.

– or button: each time it is pressed

to the point of resistance, the desired

speed increases or decreases by approx.

1 mph/1 km/h.

– or button: each time it is pressed

past the resistance point, the desired

speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/

10 km/h.

– or button: press button to resist-

ance point and hold. The vehicle acceler-

ates or decelerates without pressure on

the accelerator pedal. After the button is

released, the vehicle maintains its final

speed. Pressing the switch beyond the

resistance point causes the vehicle to

accelerate more rapidly.

Continuing cruise control

General information

An interrupted cruise control can be contin-

ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur-

rent speed and stored speed is not too large

before calling up the stored speed. Other-

Seite 171

Driving comfort CONTROLS

171

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

wise, unintentional braking or accelerating

may occur.

Calling up the stored speed

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

The stored speed is reached again and main-

tained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator light

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Depending on how the vehicle is

equipped, the indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster indicates whether the system

is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

The desired speed is displayed to-

gether with the symbol.

– Display lights up green: system is active,

the display indicates the desired speed.

– Display lights up orange: system is in-

terrupted, the display indicates the

stored speed.

– No display: system is switched off.

Instrument cluster without enhanced fea-

tures:

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that

the conditions necessary for operation are

not currently fulfilled.

System limits

Engine power

The desired speed is also maintained down-

hill, but may not be maintained on uphill

grades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control

Concept

PDC is a support when parking. The system

detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve-

hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in

front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-

jects that you are approaching slowly are in-

dicated by signal tones and a visual display.

General information

The ultrasound sensors for measuring the

distances are located in the bumpers.

The delete range, depending on obstacles

and environmental conditions, is approx.

6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-

lowing situations:

– By the front middle sensors and the two

corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm

from the object.

– By the rear middle sensors at ap-

prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.

– When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic conditions. There is a

risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-

Seite 172

CONTROLS Driving comfort

172

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

cle surroundings closely and actively in-

tervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis-

tance Control is activated, the warning can

be delayed due to physical circumstances.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Avoid approaching an object

too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC

Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors of the

PDC, for instance in the bump-

ers.

Functional requirements

Ensure full functionality:

– Do not cover sensors, for instance with

stickers, bicycle racks or similar.

– Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system switches on automatically in the

following situations:

– If selector lever position R is engaged

when the engine is running.

The rearview camera also switches on.

– With front PDC: when obstacles are de-

tected behind or in front of the vehicle

by PDC and the speed is slower than ap-

prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front PDC: automatic activation on ob-

stacle detection can be switched off. Via the

Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Parking"

4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending

on the vehicle equipment.

5. "Automatic PDC activation"

The setting is stored for the driver pro-

file currently used.

Automatic deactivation during

forward travel

The system switches off when a certain

driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off

manually

Press the park assistance button.

– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed if

the reverse gear is engaged when pressing

the park assistance button.

Seite 173

Driving comfort CONTROLS

173

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Depending on the equipment version, the

system cannot be switched off manually if

the reverse gear is engaged.

Warning

Signal tones

An intermittent tone indicates when the ve-

hicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an

object is detected to the left rear of the ve-

hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear

speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the

shorter the intervals.

When the distance to a detected object is

less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a contin-

uous tone is sounded.

With front PDC: when objects are simulta-

neously located both in front of and behind

the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig-

nal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selec-

tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles

with Steptronic transmission.

Volume

The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to

the entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "PDC"

6. Set the desired value.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can

be shown on the Control Display. Objects

that are farther away are already displayed

on the Control Display before a signal

sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park Distance

Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in

colors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera is

displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer-

tain conditions and circumstances. Due to

conditions or other factors, the system

may not respond. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the

information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the scope of the system’s opera-

tion and limitations.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects with ultrasonic

measurements can run into physical limits,

for instance under the following conditions:

– For small children and animals.

– For persons with certain clothing, for in-

stance coats.

– With external interference of the ultra-

sound, for instance from passing vehi-

cles or loud machines.

– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-

aged or out of position.

– If cargo protrudes.

– Under certain weather conditions such

as high relative humidity, wet condi-

Seite 174

CONTROLS Driving comfort

174

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong

wind.

– With tow bars and trailer couplings of

other vehicles.

– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

– With moving objects.

– With elevated, protruding objects such

as ledges or cargo.

– With objects with corners and sharp

edges.

– With objects with a fine surface struc-

ture such as fences.

– For objects with porous surfaces.

– Low objects already displayed, for in-

stance curbs, can move into the blind

area of the sensors before or after a con-

tinuous tone sounds.

False warnings

The system may issue a warning under the

following conditions even though there is

no obstacle within the detection range:

– In heavy rain.

– When sensors are very dirty or covered

with ice.

– When sensors are covered in snow.

– On rough road surfaces.

– On uneven surfaces, such as speed

bumps.

– In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, for instance in under-

ground garages.

– In automatic vehicle washes.

– Due to heavy exhaust.

– Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-

stance sweeping machines, high pres-

sure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a contin-

uous tone alternating between the front

and rear speakers. As soon as the mal-

function due to other ultrasound sources

is no longer present, the system is again

fully functional.

With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,

switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-

stacle detection, for instance in vehicle

washes; see Switching on/off.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed in the

instrument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and the

range of the sensors is dimmed on

the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked by

a dealer's service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

Concept

The rearview camera provides assistance in

parking and maneuvering backwards. The

area behind the vehicle is shown on the

Control Display.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic conditions. There is a

risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-

cle surroundings closely and actively in-

tervene where appropriate.

Seite 175

Driving comfort CONTROLS

175

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment:

button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of

the tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt.

If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is switched on automatically if

selector lever position R is engaged when

the engine is running.

Automatic deactivation during

forward travel

The system switches off when a certain

driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment:

switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shown

on the Control Display.

Switching the view via the Central

Information Display (CID)

If the rearview camera view is not dis-

played, change the view via the Central In-

formation Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirements

– The rearview camera is switched on.

– The tailgate is fully closed.

– Keep the recording range of the camera

clear.

Protruding cargo or carrier systems and

trailers that are not connected to a

trailer power socket can lead to malfunc-

tions.

Activating assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be

active at the same time.

– Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius lines are indi-

cated.

– Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Seite 176

CONTROLS Driving comfort

176

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Obstacles are marked, depending on the

vehicle equipment.

Pathway lines

Pathway lines can be superimposed on the

image of the rearview camera.

Pathway lines help you to estimate the

space required when parking and maneu-

vering on level roads.

Pathway lines depend on the current steer-

ing angle and are continuously adjusted to

the steering wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Turning radius lines can be superimposed

on the image of the rearview camera.

Turning radius lines show the course of the

smallest possible turning radius on a level

road.

Only one turning radius line is displayed af-

ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-

tain angle.

Obstacle marking

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-

cle markings can be faded into the image of

the rearview camera.

The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark-

ings match the markings of the PDC Park

Distance Control.

Parking using pathway and turning

radius lines

1. Position the vehicle so that the turning

radius lines lead to within the limits of

the parking space.

Seite 177

Driving comfort CONTROLS

177

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point

where the pathway line covers the cor-

responding turning radius line.

Display settings

Brightness

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-

ting is reached and press the Controller.

Contrast

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-

ting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objects

Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob-

jects such as ledges may not be recognized

by the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, some

assistance functions also consider data from

the PDC Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance

Control chapter.

The objects displayed on the Control Dis-

play may be closer than they appear. There-

fore, do not estimate the distance from the

objects on the display.

Parking assistant

Concept

This system assists the driver in parking

parallel to the road.

General information

Parking assistant handling is divided into

three steps:

– Switching on and activating.

– Parking space search.

– Parking.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces

on both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the best

possible parking line and takes control of

steering during the parking procedure.

System status and instructions on required

actions are displayed on the Control Dis-

play.

A component of the parking assistant is the

PDC Park Distance Control.

Seite 178

CONTROLS Driving comfort

178

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic conditions. Based on

the limits of the system, it cannot inde-

pendently react to all traffic situations.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

NOTICE

The parking assistant can steer the vehicle

over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-

age to property. Watch traffic closely and

actively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-

tance Control applies in addition.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-

ing spaces are located on the wheel hous-

ing.

Functional requirements

Ultrasound sensors

Ensure full functionality:

– Do not cover sensors, for instance with

stickers.

– Keep the sensors clean and unob-

structed.

For measuring parking spaces

– Maximum speed while driving forward

approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.

– Maximum distance to row of parked ve-

hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space

– Gaps behind an object that has a min.

length of 5 ft/1.5 m.

– Gap between two objects with a mini-

mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

– Min. length of gap between two objects:

your vehicle's length plus approx.

3.3 ft/1.0 m.

– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking

– Doors and tailgate are closed.

Seite 179

Driving comfort CONTROLS

179

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– The parking brake is released.

– When parking in parking spaces on the

driver's side, the corresponding turn sig-

nal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button

Press the park assistance button.

The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space

search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automati-

cally.

Switching on with reverse gear

Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space

search is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not availa-

ble.

White: the system is available

but not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and system

status

– Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park-

ing assistant is activated and the park-

ing space search is active.

– Control Display shows suitable parking

spaces at the edge of the road next to

the vehicle symbol. When the parking

assistant is active, suitable parking

spaces are highlighted.

– The parking procedure is

active. The system takes

over the steering.

– Parking space search is always active

whenever the vehicle is moving forward

slow and straight, even if the system is

deactivated. When the system is deacti-

vated, the displays on the Control Dis-

play are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. Press the park assistance button or

shift into reverse gear to switch on the

parking assistant, refer to page 180. Ac-

tivate the parking assistant, if needed.

Parking assistant is activated.

2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a

speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h

Seite 180

CONTROLS Driving comfort

180

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

and at a distance of maximum

5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space search

and possible parking spaces are dis-

played on the display, refer to page 180.

3. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position will

come after gear change on the station-

ary vehicle - wait for the automatic

steering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is in-

dicated on the display.

4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if

needed.

Interrupting manually

The parking assistant can be interrupted at

any time:

– Press the park assistance button.

– "Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automatically

The system is interrupted automatically in

the following situations:

– If the driver grasps the steering wheel

or takes over steering.

– If a gear is selected that does not match

the instruction on the display.

– If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

6 mph/10 km/h.

– Possibly on snow-covered or slippery

road surfaces.

– If a maximum number of parking at-

tempts or the time taken for parking is

exceeded.

– If the PDC Park Distance Control dis-

plays clearances that are too small.

– When switching into other functions of

the radio.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resuming

An interrupted parking procedure can be

continued, if needed.

Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to

page 180, and follow the instructions on the

display.

Switching off

The system can be switched off as follows:

– Press the park assistance button.

– Switching off the ignition.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer-

tain conditions and circumstances. Due to

conditions or other factors, the system

may not respond. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the

information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the scope of the system’s opera-

tion and limitations.

No parking assistance

The parking assistant does not offer assis-

tance in the following situations:

– In tight curves.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in

the following situations:

– On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads.

– On slippery ground.

Seite 181

Driving comfort CONTROLS

181

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– With accumulations of leaves/snow in

the parking space.

– With a mounted emergency wheel.

– With ditches or edges, for instance an

edge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects with ultrasonic

measurements can run into physical limits,

for instance under the following conditions:

– For small children and animals.

– For persons with certain clothing, for in-

stance coats.

– With external interference of the ultra-

sound, for instance from passing vehi-

cles or loud machines.

– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-

aged or out of position.

– If cargo protrudes.

– Under certain weather conditions such

as high relative humidity, wet condi-

tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong

wind.

– With tow bars and trailer couplings of

other vehicles.

– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

– With moving objects.

– With elevated, protruding objects such

as ledges or cargo.

– With objects with corners and sharp

edges.

– With objects with a fine surface struc-

ture such as fences.

– For objects with porous surfaces.

– Low objects already displayed, for in-

stance curbs, can move into the blind

area of the sensors before or after a con-

tinuous tone sounds.

– The parking assistant may identify park-

ing spaces that are not suitable for park-

ing.

Tire size

The parking position may vary depending

on the tire size.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-

tem checked by a dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Seite 182

CONTROLS Driving comfort

182

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by

the following components:

– Emission tested passenger compart-

ment.

– Microfilter.

– Air conditioning system to control the

temperature, air flow and recirculated-

air mode.

Depending on the equipment specification:

– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

– Automatic climate control.

– Parked-car ventilation.

Seite 183

Climate control CONTROLS

183

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings

2 Air flow

3 Temperature

4 Seat heating, right 76

5 Air conditioning

6 Recirculated-air mode

7 Rear window defroster

8 Windshield defroster

9 Seat heating, left 76

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn the wheel for air flow all

the way to the left.

Temperature

Concept

The system heats or cools, depending on the

set temperature.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de-

sired temperature.

Seite 184

CONTROLS Climate control

184

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled

and dehumidified and, depending on the

temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled with

the engine running.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con-

ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield

may fog up briefly when the engine is

started.

The air conditioner produces condensation

water, refer to page 215, that will exit from

below the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-

tants in the immediate environment by tem-

porarily suspending the supply of outside

air. The system then recirculates the air

flow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recir-

culated-air mode is switched on. The supply

of outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off,

fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte-

rior.

To prevent window condensation, recircu-

lated-air mode switches off automatically af-

ter a certain amount of time, depending on

the external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air

quality in the car's interior deteriorates and

window fogging increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off recircu-

lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if

needed.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad-

justed manually.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de-

sired air flow.

The higher the air flow, the

more effective the heating or

cooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may be

reduced automatically to save battery

power.

Controlling the air distribution

manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can

be adjusted manually.

Operation

Turn the wheel to select the

desired program or the desired

intermediate setting.

– Windows.

– Upper body region.

– Floor area.

– Windows, upper body region, and

floor area.

Seite 185

Climate control CONTROLS

185

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

To defrost windows and remove

condensation

Make the following settings to defrost the

windows and remove condensation:

– Direct the air distribution onto the win-

dows.

– Increasing the air flow.

– Increase the temperature.

– Switch on the air conditioning if needed.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster

switches off automatically after a certain

period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of

time.

For permanent activation, press the button

for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate,

press the button again.

The rear window defroster can only be acti-

vated continuously at an external tempera-

ture below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat-

ing output is reduced.

Microfilter

In external and recirculated-air mode, the

microfilter filters dust and pollen from the

air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle

maintenance, refer to page 282.

Seite 186

CONTROLS Climate control

186

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left

2 Display

3 Air flow, AUTO intensity

4 AUTO program

5 Air distribution, manual

6 Display

7 Temperature, right

8 Seat heating, right 76

9 Maximum cooling

10 Air conditioning

11 Recirculated-air mode

12 Rear window defroster

13 Windshield defroster

14 To defrost windows and remove conden-

sation

15 Seat heating, left 76

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to the

left until the control switches

off.

Temperature

Concept

The automatic climate control achieves the

set temperature as quickly as possible, if

Seite 187

Climate control CONTROLS

187

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

necessary by using the maximum cooling or

heating power, and then keeps it constant.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de-

sired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between different

temperature settings. The automatic climate

control will not have sufficient time to ad-

just the set temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled

and dehumidified and, depending on the

temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled with

the engine running.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con-

ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield

may fog up briefly when the engine is

started.

The cooling function is switched on auto-

matically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control,

condensation water, refer to page 215, de-

velops and drains underneath the vehicle.

This is normal.

Maximum cooling

Concept

The system is set to the lowest temperature,

maximum air flow and recirculated-air

mode.

General information

The function is available with external tem-

peratures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and

with the engine running.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body

region. The vents need to be open for this.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-

gram active.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the

system switched on.

AUTO program

Concept

The AUTO program cools, ventilates or

heats the car's interior automatically.

The air distribution and temperature are

controlled automatically depending on the

temperature in the car's interior and the de-

sired temperature setting including the se-

lected intensity of the air flow.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the

AUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature,

AUTO intensity and outside influences, the

air is directed to the windshield, side win-

dows, upper body, and into the floor area.

Seite 188

CONTROLS Climate control

188

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Point the side vents toward the side win-

dows.

The following features are switched on au-

tomatically with the AUTO program:

– The air conditioning, refer to page 188.

To switch off the program: press the button

again or manually adjust the air distribu-

tion.

Intensity

With the AUTO program activated, the au-

tomatic intensity control can be changed.

Turn the ring to set the de-

sired intensity from soft to in-

tensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the posi-

tion of the illuminated LED segment.

Automatic recirculated-air control/

recirculated-air mode

Concept

The automatic recirculated-air control AUC

recognizes odors or pollutants in the out-

side air. The outside air supply is shut off

and the interior air is recirculated.

General information

If the system is activated, a sensor detects

pollutants in the outside air and controls the

shut-off automatically.

If the system is deactivated, outside air con-

tinuously flows into the car's interior.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air

quality in the car's interior deteriorates and

window fogging increases.

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-

tants in the immediate environment by tem-

porarily suspending the supply of outside

air. The system then recirculates the air

flow within the vehicle.

Switching on/off

Press button repeatedly to select an

operating mode:

– LEDs off: outside air flows in continu-

ously.

– Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air

control: a sensor detects pollutants in

the outside air and shuts off automati-

cally.

– Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the

supply of outside air into the vehicle is

permanently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recircu-

lated-air mode switches off automatically af-

ter a certain amount of time, depending on

the external temperature.

If windows are fogged over, switch off the

recirculating mode and press the AUTO but-

ton. Make sure that air can flow to the

windshield.

Adjusting the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad-

justed manually.

General information

To adjust the air flow manually switch off

AUTO program first.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de-

sired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed

via illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate con-

trol may be reduced automatically to save

battery power.

Seite 189

Climate control CONTROLS

189

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting the air distribution

manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can

be adjusted manually.

Operation

Press the button repeatedly to se-

lect a program:

– Windows, upper body region, and floor

area.

– Upper body region and floor area.

– Floor area.

– Windows and floor area.

– Windows.

– Windows and upper body region.

– Upper body region.

To defrost windows and remove

condensation

Concept

Ice and condensation are quickly removed

from the windshield and the front side win-

dows.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the

system switched on.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-

gram active.

If there is window condensation, switch on

the air conditioning too.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster switches off au-

tomatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of

time.

For permanent activation, press the button

for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate,

press the button again.

The rear window defroster can only be acti-

vated continuously at an external tempera-

ture below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat-

ing output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

In external and recirculated-air mode, the

microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters

dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of

the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle

maintenance, refer to page 282.

Ventilation

Setting

The air flow directions can be individually

adjusted:

– Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto the

person. The air flow heats or cools no-

ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem-

perature.

– Indirect ventilation:

If the vents are fully or partly closed, the

air is directly routed into the car's inte-

rior.

Seite 190

CONTROLS Climate control

190

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Front ventilation

– Turn knob for continuous opening and

closing of the vents.

– Swivel the vents to alter the direction of

the vent flow, arrows.

Ventilation in the rear

– Lever for changing the air flow direc-

tion, arrow 1.

– Thumbwheel for variable opening and

closing of the vents, arrow 2.

Parked-car ventilation

Concept

The parked-car ventilation ventilates the

car's interior and lowers its temperature, if

needed.

General information

The parked-car ventilation can be switched

on and off directly or by using two preset

activation times. The system remains

switched on for 30 minutes.

The parked-car ventilation system is oper-

ated via the Central Information Display

(CID).

Functional requirements

– Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-

ready state.

– Direct operation or preset activation

time: does not depend on external tem-

perature.

– Battery is sufficiently charged.

If parked-car ventilation is switched on,

the vehicle battery will be discharged.

Thus, limit the maximum activation time

to save the vehicle battery. The system

will be available again after the engine

is started or after a short trip.

– Make sure that the vehicle's date and

time are set correctly.

– Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"

The symbol on the automatic climate

control flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the activation time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Comfort ventilation"

Seite 191

Climate control CONTROLS

191

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

5. Select the desired activation time.

6. Set the desired time.

Activating the activation time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "For start time at:"

Activate the desired activation time.

The symbol on the automatic climate

control lights up when the activation time is

activated.

The symbol on the automatic climate

control flashes when the system has been

switched on.

The system will only be switched on within

the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be

reactivated.

Seite 192

CONTROLS Climate control

192

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Integrated Universal Remote

Control

Concept

The integrated Universal Remote Control in

the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func-

tions of remote-controlled systems such as

garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys-

tems.

General information

The Integrated Universal Remote Control

replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans-

mitters. To operate the remote control, the

buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-

grammed with the desired functions. The

hand-held transmitter for the particular sys-

tem is required in order to program the re-

mote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored

functions for the sake of security.

If possible, do not install the antenna of the

remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage

door drive, near metal objects to ensure the

best possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys-

tems with the integrated universal remote

control, such as the garage door, may re-

sult in injury, for example, body parts be-

coming jammed in a garage door. There is

a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-

erty. Make sure that the area of movement

of the respective system is clear during

programming and operation. Also follow

the safety information of the hand-held

transmitter.

Compatibility

If this symbol is printed on the pack-

aging or in the owner's manual of the

system to be controlled, the system

is generally compatible with the integrated

Universal Remote Control.

Additional questions are answered by:

– A dealer's service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

– www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-

tex Corporation.

Seite 193

Interior equipment CONTROLS

193

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

1 LED

2 Programmable keys

3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information

The battery of the hand-held transmitter

must be fully charged at the time of pro-

gramming to ensure an optimal range of the

integrated universal remote control.

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons on

the interior mirror simultaneously for

approximately 10 seconds until the LED

flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro-

gramming of the buttons on the interior

mirror.

3. Press the interior mirror button to be

programmed. The LED on the interior

mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the

system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5

to 30 cm away from the buttons on the

interior mirror. The required distance

depends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desired

function on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand-

held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and re-

peatedly press and release the hand-held

transmitter button for 2 seconds.

– The LED lights up green: program-

ming completed.

Release the button.

– The LED flashes fast: programming

is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir-

ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-

form this procedure three times to

complete the programming proce-

dure.

If the integrated universal remote

control remains nonoperational, con-

tinue with the special features for

change code wireless systems.

– LED does not flash green after

60 seconds: programming not com-

pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

To program other functions on other but-

tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling code

wireless system

If you are unable to operate the system af-

ter repeated programming, please check if

the system to be controlled features a roll-

ing code radio system.

Refer to the owner's manual for the system.

For systems with a rolling code radio sys-

tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-

trol and the system also have to be

synchronized.

Please read the owner's manual to find out

how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a

second person.

Seite 194

CONTROLS Interior equipment

194

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Synchronizing the universal remote control

with the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re-

mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the inte-

rior mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing but-

ton on the system being programmed,

e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx.

30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on

the interior mirror for approximately

3 seconds and then release it. If neces-

sary, repeat this step up to three times

in order to finish synchronization. Once

synchronization is complete, the pro-

grammed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-

ton to be programmed.

3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir-

ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec-

onds, release the button.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the

system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5

to 30 cm away from the buttons on the

interior mirror. The required distance

depends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desired

function on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand-

held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and re-

peatedly press and release the hand-held

transmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. The LED can light up in different ways.

– The LED lights up green: the pro-

gramming procedure is completed.

Release the button.

– The LED flashes fast: the hand-held

transmitter was detected but pro-

gramming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir-

ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-

form this procedure three times to

complete the programming proce-

dure.

If the integrated universal remote

control remains nonoperational, con-

tinue with the special features for

change code wireless systems.

– LED does not flash green after

60 seconds: programming not com-

pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

If the programming procedure is not com-

pleted, the previous programming will re-

main unchanged.

Operation

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys-

tems with the integrated universal remote

control, such as the garage door, may re-

sult in injury, for example, body parts be-

coming jammed in a garage door. There is

a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-

erty. Make sure that the area of movement

of the respective system is clear during

programming and operation. Also follow

the safety information of the hand-held

transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be

operated using the button on the interior

mirror while the engine is running or when

the ignition is started. To do this, hold down

the button within receiving range of the

system until the function is activated. The

interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-

less signal is being transmitted.

Seite 195

Interior equipment CONTROLS

195

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Deleting stored functions

All stored functions will be deleted. The

functions cannot be deleted individually.

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the

interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-

mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in-

terior mirror flashes green rapidly.

Digital compass

Overview

1 Control button

2 Mirror display

Mirror display

The compass shows the current driving di-

rection.

Operating concept

Various functions can be called up by press-

ing the control button with a pointed object,

such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar

object. The following setting options are

displayed in succession, depending on how

long the control button is pressed:

– Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.

– 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.

– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.

– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering

setting.

– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the ve-

hicle so that the compass operates correctly;

refer to World map with compass zones.

Seite 196

CONTROLS Interior equipment

196

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure

1. Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the

set compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press the

control button quickly and repeatedly

until the number of the compass zone

that corresponds with your location ap-

pears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The

compass is ready for use again after approx-

imately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in

the event of the following:

– The wrong compass point is displayed.

– The point of the compass displayed does

not change despite changing the direc-

tion of travel.

– Not all points of the compass are dis-

played.

Procedure

1. Make sure that there are no large metal-

lic objects or overhead power lines near

the vehicle and that there is sufficient

room to drive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compass

zone.

3. Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears

on the display. Next, drive in a complete

circle at least once at a speed of no more

than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-

cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points

of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering

The digital compass is already set for right

or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language

Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the

Seite 197

Interior equipment CONTROLS

197

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

control button again to switch between

English "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after ap-

proximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shield

To provide protection against glare, fold the

sun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor

behind a cover.

When the cover is opened, the mirror light-

ing switches on.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal

cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in

the center console.

Ashtray

In order to empty the ashtray, remove the

ashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

Warning

Contact with the hot heating element or

the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can

cause burns. Flammable materials can ig-

nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is

held against the objects. There is a risk of

fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage

to property. Take hold of the cigarette

lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil-

dren do not use the cigarette lighter.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they

can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of

damage to property. Replace the cigarette

lighter or socket cover again after using

the socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter can be

removed as soon as it pops

back out.

Sockets

Concept

The lighter socket can be used as a socket

for electrical equipment while the ignition

is switched on or the engine is running.

General information

The total load of all sockets must not exceed

140 watts at 12 volts.

Seite 198

CONTROLS Interior equipment

198

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Do not damage the socket by using non-

compatible connectors.

Safety information

Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of

the airbags, such as portable navigation

devices, can hinder the unfolding of the

airbag or be thrown around in the car's in-

terior during unfolding. There is a risk of

injury. Make sure that devices and cables

are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery

can work with high voltages and currents,

which means that the 12 volt on-board

network can be overloaded or damaged.

There is a risk of damage to property. Only

connect battery chargers for the vehicle

battery to the starting aid terminals in the

engine compartment.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they

can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of

damage to property. Replace the cigarette

lighter or socket cover again after using

the socket.

In the center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side in

the cargo area.

USB port

General information

Follow the information regarding the con-

nection of mobile devices to the USB port in

the section on USB connections, refer to

page 48.

Seite 199

Interior equipment CONTROLS

199

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

In the front center console

The USB port is located in the front of the

center console.

Properties:

– USB port Type A.

– For charging mobile devices and for

data transfer.

– Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

In the rear center console

One USB dual charge socket is located in

the rear center console.

Properties:

– USB port Type C.

– For charging of mobile devices.

– Charge current: max. 3 A.

Under the center armrest

The USB port is located under the center

armrest.

Properties:

– USB port Type C.

– For charging of mobile devices.

– Charge current: max. 3 A.

Seite 200

CONTROLS Interior equipment

200

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile

phones, can be thrown about the car's in-

terior while driving, for instance in the

event of an accident, braking or evasive

maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

NOTICE

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can

damage the dashboard. There is a risk of

damage to property. Do not use anti-slip

pads.

Overview

The following storage compartments are

available in the car's interior:

– Glove compartment on the front passen-

ger side.

– Compartments in the doors.

– Storage compartment in the center arm-

rest.

– Storage compartment in front of the cup

holders.

– Clothes hooks

– Storage compartments in the cargo area.

– Storage tray in the center console.

– Pockets on the backrests of the front

seats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

Warning

Folded open, the glove compartment pro-

trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the

glove compartment can be thrown into the

car's interior while driving, for instance in

the event of an accident, braking or eva-

sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury.

Always close the glove compartment im-

mediately after using it.

Seite 201

Storage compartments CONTROLS

201

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment

switches on.

Closing

Fold up the cover.

Compartments in the doors

General information

There are storage compartments in the

doors.

Safety information

Warning

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or

glasses, can break in the event of an acci-

dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.

Broken glass can be scattered in the car's

interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of

damage to property. Do not use any break-

able objects while driving. Only stow

breakable objects in closed storage com-

partments.

Center armrest

General information

The center armrest contains a storage com-

partment.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-

rest upward, arrow 2.

Set the incline

The center armrest can be adjusted in sev-

eral tilt settings.

Cup holders

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders

may damage the cup holders or be thrown

about the car’s interior in the event of an

accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful

braking. Spilled liquids can distract from

the traffic conditions and lead to an acci-

dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup

holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk

of injury or risk of damage to property. Do

not force objects into the cup holder. Use

lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable

Seite 202

CONTROLS Storage compartments

202

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

containers. Do not transport hot bever-

ages.

Front

In the center console.

Rear

General information

The cup holder is located in the center arm-

rest.

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

To open: press the button.

To close: push both covers back in, one after

the other.

Safety information

NOTICE

With an open cup holder, the center arm-

rest cannot be folded back up. There is a

risk of damage to property. Press back the

covers before the center armrest is folded

up.

Clothes hooks

General information

The clothes hooks are located above the

rear doors.

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can

obstruct the view while driving. There is a

risk of accident. When suspending cloth-

ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure

that they will not obstruct the driver's

view.

Warning

Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead

to a risk of objects flying about during

braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a

risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-

erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-

stance clothing articles, from the clothes

hooks.

Seite 203

Storage compartments CONTROLS

203

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Safety information

Warning

High gross weight can overheat the tires,

damage them internally and cause a sud-

den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving

characteristics may be negatively im-

pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-

ing the braking distances and changing

the steering response. There is a risk of

accident. Pay attention to the permitted

load capacity of the tires and never exceed

the permitted gross weight.

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile

phones, can be thrown about the car's in-

terior while driving, for instance in the

event of an accident, braking or evasive

maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can shift and

be thrown into the car's interior, for in-

stance in the event of an accident or dur-

ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi-

cle occupants can be hit and injured. There

is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects

and cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.

There is a risk of damage to property.

Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo

area.

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on

your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding

in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity. For example, if the “XXX”

amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will

be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi-

cle, the amount of available cargo and

Seite 204

CONTROLS Cargo area

204

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 -

750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug-

gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-

hicle. That weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. Consult this manual to

determine how this reduces the availa-

ble cargo and luggage load capacity of

your vehicle.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight

of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants,

the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo

– Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.

– Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos-

sible, directly behind and at the bottom

of the rear passenger seat backrests.

– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is

not occupied, secure each of the outer

safety belts in the opposite buckle.

– If necessary, fold down the rear back-

rests to stow large cargo.

– Do not stack cargo above the top edge of

the backrests.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

With storage compartment package: to se-

cure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in

the cargo area.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashing

straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or

cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo

area.

Cargo cover

General information

When the tailgate is opened, the cargo

cover is raised.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile

phones, can be thrown about the car's in-

terior while driving, for instance in the

event of an accident, braking or evasive

maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Seite 205

Cargo area CONTROLS

205

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Removing

For storing bulky objects the cargo cover

can be removed.

1. Detach the left and right retaining

straps at the tailgate.

2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets

on the left and right.

Installing

1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon-

tally into the two side brackets until it

audibly engages.

2. Attach the left and right retaining straps

at the tailgate.

Storage compartments in the

cargo area

Storage compartment on the side

A storage compartment is located on the left

side.

Multi-function hook

Warning

Improper use of the multi-function hooks

can lead to a risk of objects flying about

during braking and evasive maneuvers,

for example. There is a risk of injury and

risk of damage to property. Only hang

lightweight objects, such as shopping

bags, from the multi-function hooks. Only

transport heavy luggage in the cargo area

if it has been appropriately secured.

The cargo area contains two multi-function

hooks.

Enlarging the cargo area

Concept

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

cargo area can be enlarged as follows:

– The rear seat backrests can be folded

down.

– The rear seat backrests can be moved

into an upright loading position using

the cargo setting.

General information

The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio

of 40–20–40. The side rear seat backrests

and the center section can be folded down

separately.

The rear seat backrests can be folded down

from the rear.

Seite 206

CONTROLS Cargo area

206

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Danger of jamming with folding down the

backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. Make sure that the

area of movement of the rear backrest and

the of the head restraint is clear prior to

folding down.

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-

cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s

interior; for instance, in the event of an ac-

cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.

There is a risk of injury. Make sure that

the rear seat backrest is locked after fold-

ing it back.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seat

backrest while driving may occur due to

unintentional unlocking of the rear seat

backrests by the straps. There is a risk of

injury. Only use straps for releasing the

rear seat backrests. Do not attach objects

on the straps.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect

seat adjustment or improper installation of

the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or

danger to life. Make sure that the child re-

straint system fits securely against the

backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest

tilt for all affected backrests and correctly

adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and

backrests are securely engaged or locked.

If possible, adjust the height of the head

restraints or remove them.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving

the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the area of movement is

clear when moving the head restraint.

Folding down the rear seat

backrest from the rear

Pull the strap. The rear seat backrest folds

forward.

Cargo position

Concept

The rear seat backrests can be moved into

an upright loading position individually. An

adjustment in several tilt stages is possible

as needed.

Seite 207

Cargo area CONTROLS

207

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting

1. Pull the strap.

2. Set the loading position of the rear seat

backrest as required.

3. Engage the rear seat backrest.

Folding back the backrest

Without a cargo position:

1. Pull the strap.

2. Return the rear seat backrest to the up-

right seating position and engage it.

With a cargo position:

1. Pull the strap.

2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward.

The rear seat backrest first engages in

the loading position.

3. Pull the strap again.

4. Return the rear seat backrest to the up-

right seating position and engage it.

Variable cargo area floor

Concept

With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo

area can be configured corresponding to

transport requirements.

General information

Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer

to page 204.

Seite 208

CONTROLS Cargo area

208

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Removing the cargo floor panel

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer

to page 206.

2. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor

panel upward.

3. Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear

and fold up above the locking point of

the upper position, refer to page 209.

4. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from

the brackets.

Inserting the cargo floor panel

1. Push the cargo area floor into the sup-

ports at a shallow angle. The cargo area

floor must engage noticeably.

2. Fold the cargo area floor over down-

ward.

Folded up position

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the variable cargo floor

panel can lead to a danger of objects flying

about during braking and evasive maneu-

vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of

damage to property.

– Do not use the variable cargo floor

panel to separate the cargo area and

car's interior in the sense of a parti-

tion net.

– Only use the variable cargo floor

panel in the folded-up position when

the backrests are folded up and

locked.

– Fold down the variable cargo floor

panel before driving off.

– Always secure cargo against shifting,

using straps, belts and lashing eyes,

for instance.

Fold up the cargo floor panel

Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel

upward.

Fold up the cargo floor panel. You've

reached the maximum cargo height.

Seite 209

Cargo area CONTROLS

209

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

MINI Picnic Bench

Concept

The MINI Picnic Bench provides a comfort-

able seating surface on the loading lip of the

vehicle.

General information

Only use the MINI Picnic Bench while the

vehicle is parked and with the tailgate open.

When the MINI Picnic Bench is not in use,

fold it together to prevent soiling and dam-

age.

In vehicles with a no-touch opening and

closing tailgate:

If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the

tailgate can be opened or closed inadver-

tently by an unconscious or alleged recog-

nized foot movement.

The sensor has an approximate range of

5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the

vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating

the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the tail-

gate is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

The MINI Picnic Bench is located on the un-

derside of the cargo area floor.

Mounting

1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor

panel upward.

2. Place the MINI Picnic Bench on the

front part of the cargo floor panel and at-

tach it to the rear part of the cargo floor

panel using the four snaps.

3. Fold down the MINI Picnic Bench to-

ward the rear. The MINI Picnic Bench is

fastened with magnets.

4. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor

downward.

To disassemble the MINI Picnic Bench, pro-

ceed in reverse order.

Seite 210

CONTROLS Cargo area

210

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Folding down

1. Lift the rear part of the cargo area floor.

2. Grasp the MINI Picnic Bench in the mid-

dle and pull it back and up against the

force of the magnets.

3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor

downward and place the MINI Picnic

Bench over the loading lip of the cargo

area. Place a protective cloth over the

bumper.

Folding up

Fold rear part of the cargo floor panel up-

ward.

The MINI Picnic Bench swings against the

underside of the cargo area floor and is fas-

tened there with magnets.

Seite 211

Cargo area CONTROLS

211

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Breaking-in period

General information

Moving parts need to begin working to-

gether smoothly.

The following instructions will help you to

achieve a long vehicle life and good effi-

ciency.

During break-in, do not use the Launch

Control, refer to page 115.

Safety information

Warning

Due to new parts and components, safety

and driver assistance systems can react

with a delay. There is a risk of accident.

After installing new parts or with a new

vehicle, drive conservatively and inter-

vene early if necessary. Observe the break-

in procedures of the respective parts and

components.

Engine, transmission, and axle

drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Do not exceed the maximum engine and

road speed:

– For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir-

cumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually

be increased.

Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-

turing circumstances when tires are brand-

new; they achieve their full traction poten-

tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first

200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brake discs and brake pads only reach their

full effectiveness after ap-

prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately

during this break-in period.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its opti-

mal level only after a distance driven of ap-

prox. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-

in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be ob-

served if any of the components mentioned

Seite 212

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

212

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

above have to be renewed in the course of

the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Safety information

Warning

An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi-

cle and can endanger occupants and other

traffic participants or damage the vehicle

in the event of an accident, braking or eva-

sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust

fumes may enter the car's interior. There

is a risk of injury or risk of damage to

property. Do not drive with the tailgate

open.

Driving with the tailgate open

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be

avoided:

– Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

– Greatly increase the air flow from the

vents.

– Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust gas system

Warning

High temperatures can occur underneath

the body, for instance caused by the ex-

haust gas system, while driving. Contact

with the exhaust gas system can cause

burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not

touch the hot exhaust gas system, includ-

ing the exhaust pipe.

Warning

If combustible materials, such as leaves or

grass, come in contact with hot parts of

the exhaust gas system, these materials

can ignite. There is a risk of fire and inju-

ries. Do not remove the heat shields instal-

led and never apply undercoating to them.

Make sure that no combustible materials

can come in contact with hot vehicle parts

in driving operation, idle or during park-

ing.

Mobile communication devices in

the vehicle

Warning

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can

influence one another. There is radiation

due to the transmission operations of mo-

bile phones. There is a risk of injury or

risk of damage to property. If possible, in

the car's interior use only mobile phones

with direct connections to an exterior an-

tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-

ence and deflect the radiation from the

car's interior.

Hydroplaning

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water

can form between the tires and road sur-

face.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-

planing. It is characterized by a partial or

complete loss of contact between the tires

and the road surface, ultimately undermin-

ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi-

cle.

Seite 213

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

213

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driving through water

General information

When driving through water, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function.

– Drive through calm water only.

– Drive through water only if it is not

deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.

– Drive through water no faster than

walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through too

deep water, water can enter into the en-

gine compartment, the electrical system or

the transmission. There is a risk of damage

to property. When driving through water,

do not exceed the maximum indicated wa-

ter level and the maximum speed for driv-

ing through water.

Braking safely

General information

The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock

Braking System ABS as a standard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situations

that require such.

Steering is still responsive. You can still

avoid any obstacles with a minimum of

steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds

from the hydraulic circuits indicate that

ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit

the pedal distance or block a depressed

pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-

jects in the vehicle such that they are se-

cured and cannot enter into the driver's

floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable

for the vehicle and can be safely attached

to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats

and do not layer several floor mats. Make

sure that there is sufficient clearance for

the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are

securely fastened again after they were re-

moved, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy

rain, gently press the brake pedal every few

miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger

other traffic.

The heat generated during braking dries

brake discs and brake pads and protects

them against corrosion.

In this way braking efficiency will be avail-

able when you need it.

Hills

General information

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in

the gear that requires least braking effort.

Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re-

duce brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect

by shifting down, going all the way to first

gear, if needed.

Seite 214

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

214

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Light but consistent brake pressure can

lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing

out and possibly even brake failure. There

is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces-

sive stress on the brake system.

Warning

In idle state or with the engine switched

off, safety functions, for instance engine

braking effect, braking assistance and

steering assistance, may not be available.

There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt

to drive in idle state or with the engine

switched off.

Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contami-

nation on the brake pads are increased by

the following circumstances:

– Low mileage.

– Extended periods when the vehicle is

not used at all.

– Infrequent use of the brakes.

– Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning

agents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will

cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in

their response - generally this cannot be

corrected.

Condensation water under the

parked vehicle

When using the automatic climate control,

condensation water develops and collects

underneath the vehicle.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g.,

curbs or underground garage entrances,

contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler,

and the underbody may occur. There is a

risk of damage to property. Ensure that

there is sufficient ground clearance availa-

ble.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General information

Installation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accesso-

ries.

Mounting

Follow the installation instructions of the

roof rack.

Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise

the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded,

they have a major effect on vehicle handling

and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading

and driving:

– Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicle

weight.

– Be sure that adequate clearance is main-

tained for tilting and opening the glass

sunroof.

– Distribute the roof load uniformly.

– The roof load should not extend past the

loading area.

Seite 215

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

215

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– Always place the heaviest pieces on the

bottom.

– Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-

stance using ratchet straps.

– Do not let objects project into the open-

ing path of the tailgate.

– Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-

celeration and braking maneuvers. Take

corners gently.

Driving on poor roads

Concept

Because of its greater ground clearance, the

vehicle can be driven on a variety of road

types and qualities.

All-wheel drive can help improve forward

momentum.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in unpaved areas, for instance

stones or branches, can damage the vehi-

cle. There is a risk of damage to property.

Do not drive on unpaved terrain.

When driving on poor roads

For your own safety, for the safety of pas-

sengers and of the vehicle, heed the follow-

ing points:

– Familiarize yourself with the vehicle be-

fore driving.

– Do not take risks when driving.

– Adjust the speed to the road surface

conditions. The steeper and more un-

even the road surface, the slower the

speed.

– When driving on steep uphill or down-

hill grades: add engine oil and coolant

up to near the MAX mark.

– Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in

contact with the ground. The ground

clearance may vary depending on the

vehicle load.

– When wheels continue to spin, depress

the accelerator so that driving stability

control systems can distribute the driv-

ing force to the wheels. Activate DTC

Dynamic Traction Control if available.

After a trip on poor roads

Note the following to maintain driving

safety:

– Clear heavy soiling from the body.

– Keep the wheels and tires free of mud,

snow, ice, etc., and check them for dam-

age.

Driving on racetracks

Warning

The vehicle is not designed for use in M

Sport or motor sport type competition.

There is a risk of accident. Do not use the

vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type

competitions.

Higher mechanical and thermal loads during

racetrack operation lead to increased wear.

This wear is not covered by the warranty.

Seite 216

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

216

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Reducing fuel consumption

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

The vehicle contains advanced technologies

for the reduction of consumption and emis-

sion values.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of

different factors.

The implementation of certain measures,

driving style and regular maintenance can

influence fuel consumption and environ-

mental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consump-

tion.

Remove attached parts follow-

ing use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or

rear luggage racks which are no longer re-

quired following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the

aerodynamics and increase the fuel con-

sumption.

Close the windows and glass

sunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows

open results in increased air resistance and

raises fuel consumption.

Tires

General information

Tires can affect consumption in various

ways, for instance tire size may influence

consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure

regularly

Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla-

tion pressure at least twice a month and be-

fore starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling

resistance and thus raises fuel consumption

and tire wear.

Drive away without delay

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up

while the vehicle remains stationary. Start

driving right away, but at moderate engine

speeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engine

to reach its operating temperature.

Seite 217

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

217

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Look well ahead when driving

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces

fuel consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak-

ing.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the

vehicle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high engine speeds

Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel

consumption and reduces wear.

If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift

indicator, refer to page 124.

Use coasting conditions

When approaching a red light, take your

foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle

coast to a halt.

For going downhill take your foot off the ac-

celerator and let the vehicle roll.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coast-

ing.

Switch off the engine during

longer stops

Switching off the engine

Switch off the engine during longer stops,

for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross-

ings or in traffic congestion.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle

automatically switches off the engine dur-

ing a stop.

If the engine is switched off and then re-

started rather than leaving the engine run-

ning constantly, fuel consumption and emis-

sions are reduced. Savings can begin within

a few seconds of switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also deter-

mined by other factors, such as driving

style, road conditions, maintenance or envi-

ronmental factors.

Switch off any functions that

are not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear

window defroster require a lot of energy

and consume additional fuel, especially in

city and stop-and-go traffic.

Switch off these functions if they are not

needed.

Have maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly to

achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-

ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-

nance work be performed by a MINI service

center.

Also note the MINI maintenance systems,

refer to page 282.

GREEN Mode

Concept

GREEN Mode supports a driving style that

saves on consumption. For this purpose, the

engine control and comfort features, for in-

stance the climate control output, are ad-

justed.

For Steptronic transmission:

Seite 218

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

218

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Under certain conditions the engine is auto-

matically decoupled from the transmission

in the D selector lever position. The vehicle

continues traveling with the engine idling

to reduce consumption. The D selector lever

position remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions

are displayed to assist with an efficient

driving style.

The achieved extended range is displayed in

the instrument cluster as bonus range.

General information

The system includes the following functions

and displays:

– GREEN Limit, refer to page 219

– GREEN climate control, refer to

page 219.

– GREEN bonus range, refer to page 220.

– GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to

page 220.

– Coasting driving condition, refer to

page 221.

Activating GREEN Mode

Press the MINI Driving Modes

switch downward until

GREEN is displayed in the in-

strument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activating GREEN Mode.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Select the desired setting.

Via the Central Information Display

(CID)

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure GREEN"

5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating the functions

The following functions can be activated/

deactivated:

– "GREEN speed warning"

– "GREEN climate control"

– "Coasting"

Settings are stored for the driver profile

currently used.

GREEN Limit

– "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit

is activated.

A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of

the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.

– "Tip at:"

Set the desired speed for the GREEN

Limit.

GREEN climate control

Climate control is set to be efficient.

By making a slight change to the set tem-

perature and adjusting the rate of heating

or cooling of the car's interior consumption

can be economized.

The power output to the seat heater and ex-

terior mirror is reduced.

Coasting

Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging

the engine and coasting, refer to page 221,

with the engine idling.

Seite 219

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

219

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

This function is only available in GREEN

Mode.

Deactivate the function to use the braking

effect of the engine when traveling down-

hill.

GREEN potential savings

Shows potential savings with the current

settings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN bonus range

A modified driving style helps

you extend your driving range.

The range extension can be

displayed as the bonus range

in the instrument cluster.

The bonus range is shown in the range dis-

play.

The bonus range is automatically reset ev-

ery time the vehicle is refueled.

– Green display: efficient driving style.

– Gray display: modify driving style, for

instance by backing off the accelerator

pedal.

Efficiency display

A bar display in the instru-

ment cluster indicates your

current driving efficiency.

Mark in the left area, arrow 1:

display for energy recovered

by coasting or when braking.

Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display

when accelerating.

The efficiency of your driving style is

shown by the position of the mark:

– Mark inside the green range: efficient

driving style.

– Mark outside the green range: modify

driving style, for example by backing off

the accelerator.

GREEN tip, driving instruction

General information

The GREEN tip indicates that your driving

style can be modified to be more efficient,

for example by backing off the accelerator.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features: display

Activating/deactivating the display

Activate information relating to the driving

style and GREEN tips in the instrument

cluster using the Central Information Dis-

play (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "GREEN info"

GREEN tip, symbols

An additional symbol and text instructions

are displayed.

Seite 220

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

220

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Symbol Measure

For an efficient driving style,

look well ahead when driving,

accelerate conservatively, and

delay accelerating.

Reduce speed to the selected

GREEN speed.

Steptronic transmission:

Switch from M/S to D and avoid

manual shift interventions.

Manual transmission:

Follow the shift instructions.

Manual transmission:

Engage neutral for an engine

stop.

Coasting

Concept

The function helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the en-

gine is automatically decoupled from the

transmission when selector lever position D

is set. The vehicle continues traveling with

the engine idling to reduce consumption.

Selector lever position D remains engaged.

This driving condition is referred to as

coasting.

As soon as you step on the brake or acceler-

ator pedal, the engine is automatically cou-

pled again.

General information

Coasting is a component of the GREEN driv-

ing mode.

Coasting is automatically activated when

the GREEN driving mode is called via the

MINI Driving Modes switch, refer to

page 160.

A proactive driving style helps the driver to

use the function often and supports the effi-

cient effect of coasting.

Functional requirements

The function is available in the speed range

from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to

100 mph/160 km/h.

– Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are

not operated.

– The selector lever is in selector lever po-

sition D.

– Engine and transmission are at operat-

ing temperature.

– With a camera in the area of the interior

mirror: the system does not detect any

vehicles ahead of you.

Operation via shift paddles

Concept

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the

coasting mode can be influenced with the

shift paddles.

Activating/deactivating coasting via shift

paddles

1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the

right shift paddle.

2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the

right shift paddle again.

To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.

Seite 221

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

221

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Display

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features

The bar display below the tachometer is fil-

led in green and the mark appears at the

zero point. The tachometer indicates idle

speed.

System limits

The function is not available if one of the

following conditions applies:

– DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.

– Cruise control is activated.

– If driving in the dynamic limit range.

– If driving on steep uphill or downhill

grades.

– The battery charge state is temporarily

too low.

– The vehicle electrical system is drawing

excessive current.

Seite 222

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

222

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Seite 223

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

223

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

General information

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Control elements

1 Waveband/satellite radio

2 Change entertainment sources

3 Sound output on/off, volume

4 Changing the station/track

5 Programmable memory buttons

Sound output

Safety information

Warning

A high sound output volume can damage

your hearing. There is a risk of injury. Do

not adjust the volume too high.

Volume and sound output

– Turn the button to adjust the vol-

ume.

– Press the button to switch off the

sound output. Pressing the but-

ton again restores the previous

volume setting.

Audio recording playback is stopped during

muting.

Entertainment sources

General information

Possible entertainment sources:

– Radio, refer to page 228.

– USB audio, refer to page 236.

– Bluetooth audio, refer to page 236.

Changing the entertainment source

On the radio:

1. Press the button.

A list of all currently available entertain-

ment sources is displayed.

Seite 224

ENTERTAINMENT General information

224

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

2. Press the button again to select

an entertainment source.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Media/Radio"

A list of all possible entertainment sour-

ces is displayed.

2. Select the desired entertainment source.

Via the button on the Controller:

1. Press the button.

The most recently selected entertain-

ment source is played.

2. Press the button again.

A list of all currently available entertain-

ment sources is displayed.

3. Select the desired entertainment source.

Seite 225

General information ENTERTAINMENT

225

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tone

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

Settings are stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Treble, bass, balance, and

fader

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired setting:

– "Treble": treble adjustment.

– "Bass": depth adjustment.

– "Balance": left/right volume distribu-

tion.

– "Fader": front/rear volume distribu-

tion.

4. To adjust: turn the Controller.

5. To store: press the Controller.

Volume equalization

Concept

An automatic increase of the volume can be

set to compensate for the increasing driving

noises at higher speeds.

Set automatic volume increase

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

4. Select the desired setting:

– "Speed volume": ratio of entertain-

ment volume to speed.

– "PDC": ratio of the volume of the PDC

signal tone to the entertainment vol-

ume.

The basic setting ensures that the

signal tone is audible at any volume.

– "Gong": ratio of the volume of the

signal tone, for instance for safety

belt reminder, to the entertainment

volume.

The basic setting ensures that the

signal tone is audible at any volume.

– "Microphone": sensitivity of the mi-

crophone during a phone call.

The setting is adjusted while calling

and is stored for the mobile phone

used.

– "Speakers": volume of the loudspeak-

ers during a phone call.

Audio recording playback is stopped

during muting.

The setting is adjusted while calling

and is stored for the mobile phone

used.

Seite 226

ENTERTAINMENT Tone

226

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Reset the tone settings

The tone settings are reset to the factory

settings.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Tone"

3. "Reset"

Seite 227

Tone ENTERTAINMENT

227

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Radio

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

Settings are stored for the driver profile

currently used.

AM/FM station

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

country version, it may not be possible to

receive AM stations.

Radio Data System RDS

Concept

RDS broadcasts additional information,

such as the station name, in the FM wave-

band.

It is recommended to switch on RDS.

Switching on/off

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Press the button.

4. "RDS"

Selecting a station

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

The last station listened to will be

played and the station list displayed.

3. Select the desired station.

Changing the station

On the radio:

Press the left or right button.

The previous or next station from the list of

stations is played.

Storing a station

General information

A symbol on the highlighted channel indi-

cates whether the channel has already been

stored.

Symbol Meaning

Station is not stored.

Station is already stored.

Storing the station being played

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Save station"

The storage list is displayed.

5. Select the desired memory location.

Seite 228

ENTERTAINMENT Radio

228

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Storing a station that is not being

played

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Highlight the desired station.

4. Press the Controller and hold until the

storage list is displayed.

5. Select the desired memory location.

The stations can also be stored on the pro-

grammable memory buttons, refer to

page 41.

Selecting a station manually

Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Manual search"

5. To select the frequency: turn the Con-

troller.

6. To store the frequency: press the Con-

troller.

Renaming a station

When storing a station with RDS signal, the

RDS information transferred during storing

is accepted as the station name. The station

name can be changed.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Press the button.

5. "Rename to:"

If necessary, wait until the name of the

desired station appears.

6. Press the Controller to store this name.

Additional station information

Concept

If a radio station broadcasts radio text or

radio text plus, this information can be dis-

played, for instance the track or performer

of the music. Availability, content and se-

quence are set by the radio station.

Displaying additional station

information

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Press the button.

5. "Station info"

HD Radio™ reception

Concept

Many radio stations broadcast both analog

and digital signals.

General information

When setting a station with a digital signal,

it may take a few seconds before the station

plays in digital quality.

Information about HD Radio stations whose

station name ends with ...HD or with ...HD1:

In areas in which the station is not continu-

ously received in digital mode, the playback

switches between analog and digital recep-

tion. In this case, switch off digital radio re-

ception.

Information about HD Radio multicast sta-

tions whose station name ends

with ...HD2, ...HD3, ...:

In areas in which the station is not continu-

ously received in digital mode, there may be

interruptions of the audible signal lasting

Seite 229

Radio ENTERTAINMENT

229

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

several seconds. The duration of the inter-

ruption depends on the reception.

Activating/deactivating digital radio

reception

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Press the button.

4. "HD Radio reception"

This symbol is displayed in the status

line when the audio signal is digital.

Displaying additional information

Some stations broadcast additional informa-

tion on the current track, such as the name

of the artist.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select a station.

4. Press the button.

5. "Station info"

License conditions

HD Radio Technology manu-

factured under license from

iBiquity Digital Corporation. U. S. and For-

eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD

Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary

trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Satellite radio

General information

Before a channel can be played, you must

subscribe to it via telephone. Several chan-

nels can be combined into specified pack-

ages.

Managing a subscription

General information

In order to enable or unsubscribe from

channels, you must have reception. It is

usually at its best when you have an unob-

structed view of the sky. The channel name

is displayed in the status line.

Enabling channels

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Show subscription info"

The phone number and identification

number of the radio are displayed.

5. Call the phone number to have the chan-

nel enabled.

You can unsubscribe from the channels

again via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Show subscription info"

The phone number and identification

number of the radio are displayed.

5. Call the phone number to cancel your

subscription to the channel.

Selecting channels

You can only listen to enabled channels.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

The last channel played will be played

back and the channel list displayed.

Seite 230

ENTERTAINMENT Radio

230

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. Select the desired channel from the

channel list.

To display information about the selected

channel:

1. Highlight a channel.

2. Press the button.

3. "Channel information"

Adjusting display of the channel

list

The display of the playback list can be ad-

justed.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Change view"

5. Select the desired display:

– "Channel"

The name of the channel will be dis-

played.

– "Artist"

The name of the artist playing will

be displayed.

– "Titles"

The name of the track playing will be

displayed.

Changing the channel

Press the button on the radio.

The next and/or previous channel from the

channel list is played.

Storing a channel

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

A symbol on the highlighted channel indi-

cates whether the channel has already been

stored.

Symbol Meaning

Channel is not stored.

Channel is already stored.

To store the channel played:

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Save station"

The storage list is displayed.

3. Select the desired memory location.

Or:

1. Highlight the played channel.

2. Press the Controller.

The storage list is displayed.

3. Select the desired memory location.

To store a channel other than the one

played:

1. Highlight the desired channel.

2. Press the Controller and hold until the

storage list is displayed.

3. Select the desired memory location.

Or:

1. Highlight the desired channel.

2. Press the button.

3. "Save in presets"

The storage list is displayed.

4. Select the desired memory location.

The stations can also be stored on the pro-

grammable memory buttons.

Selecting a category

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

Seite 231

Radio ENTERTAINMENT

231

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Category"

5. Select the desired category.

The subscribed channels from this cate-

gory are displayed.

6. Select the desired channel.

Timeshift

General information

The channel you are currently listening to is

stored in a buffer for up to an hour.

Prerequisite: the signal must be available.

The stored audio track can be played with a

delay following the live broadcast. When

the memory is full, the older tracks are over-

written. The memory is cleared when a new

channel is selected or when the vehicle is

switched off.

Opening the timeshift function

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Time shift"

Time shift forward/reverse

Within the stored recording, it is possible

to jump to any point in time.

Press the button on the radio or

turn the Controller.

You can jump to the next or the previous

track.

Press and hold the button on the

radio.

The recording is spooled forward or back.

Timeshift menu

Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast.

Automatic timeshift deacti-

vated/activated.

/ Playback/pause.

Automatic timeshift

With automatic timeshift, audio playback is

paused for the following events.

– Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.

– Activation of the voice activation sys-

tem.

– Muting.

After that, audio playback is continued from

the time of the interruption.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. To activate:

"Automatic time shift"

Deactivate:

"Automatic time shift".

Smart Favorites

General information

A maximum of 6 channels can be stored as

Smart Favorites.

If a stored channel is selected, the current

track will be played from the beginning.

Adding the current channel to Smart

Favorites

1. Press the button.

2. "Add to Smart Favorites"

Seite 232

ENTERTAINMENT Radio

232

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Removing the current channel from

Smart Favorites

1. Press the button.

2. "Remove from Smart Favorites"

Selecting Smart Favorite

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Category"

5. Select a Smart Favorite.

The subscribed channels from this cate-

gory are displayed.

6. Select the desired channel.

Favorites

General information

A performer, a track, a league or a team can

be stored as a favorite. If the stored favorite

is played on a channel, a message appears

on the Control Display. Up to 30 Favorites

can be stored.

Storing the artist or track

It is only possible to store Favorites that are

currently being broadcast. The channel in-

formation must be available.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Add to favorites"

5. Highlight the performer or track, and

press the Controller.

A symbol indicates whether the artist and

track were already stored.

Symbol Meaning

Artist/track is not stored.

Artist/track was already stored.

Storing the league or team

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Add to favorites"

5. "Add sports information"

6. Select the type of sport desired.

7. Select the desired team.

Activating/deactivating a notification

A notification can be displayed when a se-

lected favorite is being played.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Manage favorites"

The stored Favorites are displayed.

5. "Activate alert"

Set a check mark to activate notification

for the selected Favorites.

Remove the check mark to deactivate

notification for the selected Favorites.

6. Select the desired Favorites.

Opening the Favorites

If an activated favorite is played back, the

following message is displayed for approx.

20 seconds: "Favorite on air!".

To change to the played Favorites:

Tap on the message on the Control Display.

Or:

1. Move the Controller to the left.

Seite 233

Radio ENTERTAINMENT

233

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

2. "Favorite alert"

Select the symbol while the message is

shown.

The displayed favorite is played.

When the message disappears, the list of

channels that is currently playing one of the

stored Favorites can be displayed.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Category"

3. Select the Favorites list.

The channels that are currently playing

a favorite are displayed.

4. Select the channel that you would like to

change to.

Deleting Favorites

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Manage favorites"

The stored Favorites are displayed.

5. Highlight the desired favorites.

6. Press the button.

7. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump

General information

Traffic and weather information for a se-

lected region is broadcast every few mi-

nutes.

Selecting a region

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Configure jump"

5. Select the desired region.

Activating/deactivating Traffic Jump

You must have reception in order to acti-

vate or deactivate.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Configure jump"

5. "Jump to:"

Place a check mark to activate Traffic

Jump.

Information for the selected region is

broadcast as soon as it is available.

Remove the check mark to deactivate

Traffic Jump.

Channel magazine

In the channel magazine, the current and

subsequent program for each channel

booked is displayed.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "SiriusXM program guide"

Automatic update

About twice a year, Sirius performs an up-

date of the channel names and positions.

The update takes place automatically and

may take several minutes.

System limits

– Reception may not be available in some

situations, such as under certain envi-

ronmental or topographical conditions.

The satellite radio has no influence on

this.

Seite 234

ENTERTAINMENT Radio

234

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– Graphical contents can be received un-

der certain circumstances.

– The signal may not be available in tun-

nels or underground garages next to tall

buildings or near trees, mountains or

other powerful sources of radio interfer-

ence.

Stored stations

General information

Up to 40 stations can be stored.

Selecting a station

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the desired station.

Deleting a station

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Highlight the station you want to delete.

4. Press the button.

5. "Delete entry"

Seite 235

Radio ENTERTAINMENT

235

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Audio

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

Music tracks, audio books, and podcasts can

be played back. Sound is played back

through the vehicle loudspeakers.

Settings are stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

following audio sources can be used:

Symbol Meaning

USB storage device.

Bluetooth audio.

USB storage device

Playable formats

Popular audio formats such as MP3, AAC or

WMA can be played.

Apple iPod/iPhone

The music search and playback of Apple

iPod/iPhone are supported.

Audio player and storage media

with USB port

Information on all music tracks, for instance

artist, genre or track, as well as playback

lists, are transmitted into the vehicle. This

may take some time, depending on the USB

storage device, file size, and number of

tracks.

During the transfer, the tracks can be called

up via the file directory.

The information for approx. 10,000 tracks

can be stored in the vehicle.

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights

Management DRM cannot be played.

Selecting the USB storage device

Information on the USB port, refer to

page 199.

1. Connecting USB storage devices to the

USB port.

The adapter cable supplied with the USB

storage device would be ideal.

2. "Media/Radio"

3. "USB"

Or:

Select the name of the USB storage de-

vice.

Further playback descriptions, refer to

page 237.

Bluetooth audio

General information

– Playback of music files on external devi-

ces such as audio devices or mobile

phones via Bluetooth.

Seite 236

ENTERTAINMENT Audio

236

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– The volume of the sound output depends

on the device. If necessary, adjust the

volume on the device.

– Up to four external devices can be con-

nected to the vehicle.

Functional requirements

– Bluetooth device is connected to the ve-

hicle.

– Bluetooth audio playback was activated.

Selecting the Bluetooth device

1. "Media/Radio"

2. Select the desired Bluetooth device from

the list.

Further playback descriptions, refer to

page 237.

If the Bluetooth device is not listed in the

device list, Bluetooth audio playback may

have not been activated. To activate Blue-

tooth audio playback, proceed as follows:

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Manage mobile devices"

3. Select the desired Bluetooth device.

4. "Bluetooth® audio"

Playback

General information

Once an audio source has been selected, in-

formation on playback appears on the Con-

trol Display.

Information available for the current track

followed by the playback list is shown on

the Control Display. Content and scope of

the playback list depend on the type of the

selected playback source and the search cri-

teria applied.

For USB and Bluetooth devices, the selected

playback list is displayed. This can be the

result of a search or of a previously stored

playback list.

Further functions are displayed by moving

the Controller to the left. The scope of these

functions depends on the selected audio

source.

Depending on the supported Bluetooth ver-

sion, some Bluetooth device functions may

not be available when using the Central In-

formation Display (CID). If necessary, the

missing functions can be accessed directly

on the device itself.

Selecting a track

Select the desired track from the playlist.

Starting with the selected track, all tracks of

the playback list are played.

Changing the track

On the radio:

Press the left or right button.

The previous or next track from the playlist

is played.

Fast forward/reverse

On the radio:

Press and hold the left or right but-

ton.

Search criteria

General information

The possible search criteria depend on the

selected audio source.

Seite 237

Audio ENTERTAINMENT

237

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Searching for track information

The following search criteria refer to the

data stored in the track information.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. Select the desired setting:

– "Search"

All the tracks containing the search

string are displayed. Entering more

characters will continue to narrow

down the search results.

Tilt the Controller to the right to dis-

play the list of results.

– "Genres"

A list of all available genres is dis-

played.

Select a genre to display all respec-

tive artists.

– "Artists"

A list of all available artists is dis-

played.

Select an artist to display all respec-

tive albums and tracks.

– "Albums"

A list of all available albums is dis-

played.

Select an album to display all respec-

tive tracks.

– "Titles"

A list of all available tracks is dis-

played.

4. Select album, if needed.

5. Select the track at which the playback is

going to begin.

The search for artists and titles can also be

selected directly.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Artists" or "Titles"

Tracks where the selected search criterion

is not stored are summarized under "un-

known". Tracks without track information

can only be found via the directory struc-

ture.

Search playlists

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. "Playlists"

A list of all available playback lists is

displayed.

4. Select the playback list.

5. Select the track at which the playback is

going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the

Control Display. A playback list is cre-

ated from the search results.

Search audio books and podcasts

Depending on the USB storage device and

equipment, separate audio book and podcast

searches are possible.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. Select the desired setting:

– "Podcasts"

A list of all available podcasts is dis-

played.

– "Audio books"

A list of all available audio books is

displayed.

4. Select the track at which the playback is

going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the

Control Display. A playback list is cre-

ated from the search results.

Seite 238

ENTERTAINMENT Audio

238

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Search directory structure

It is possible to search the USB storage de-

vices via the directory structure.

The names of folders and tracks correspond

to folder and file names. The folder and file

names can deviate from the names in the

track information.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. "Browse folder"

4. Change into a sub folder, if needed.

Select the track at which the playback is

going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the

Control Display. A playback list is cre-

ated from the search results.

Random playback

Concept

The current playlist or all tracks of the se-

lected audio source are played back in ran-

dom order.

Select random

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Shuffle"

Seite 239

Audio ENTERTAINMENT

239

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Telephone

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Telephone functions

General information

Mobile phones can be connected to the ve-

hicle via Bluetooth. Pair and connect the

mobile phone with the vehicle, refer to

page 46.

At high temperatures, the charge function

of the mobile phone can be limited where

appropriate and functions are no longer exe-

cuted.

Do not operate a mobile phone that is con-

nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone

keypad, as this may lead to a malfunction.

When the mobile phone is used via the ve-

hicle, refer to the owner's manual of the mo-

bile phone.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys-

tems and communication devices while

driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-

sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is

a risk of accident. Only use the systems or

devices when the traffic situation allows.

As warranted, stop and use the systems

and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Incoming call

If the number of the caller is stored in the

phone book and is transmitted by the net-

work, the name of the contact is displayed.

Otherwise, only the phone number is dis-

played.

Accepting a call

Incoming calls can be answered in several

ways.

– Via Central Information Display (CID):

"Accept"

– /

Press the corresponding button on the

steering wheel.

Rejecting a call

"Reject"

Ending a call

– Via Central Information Display (CID):

"End call"

– /

Press the corresponding button on the

steering wheel.

Last calls

The last outgoing, missed, and incoming

calls are transferred to the vehicle.

Seite 240

COMMUNICATION Telephone

240

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Displays

1. "Communication"

2. "Recent calls"

3. The 20 last calls are displayed.

Filtering call list

1. "Calls:"

2. Select the desired setting.

Selecting number from list

Select from list. Call is established via the

mobile phone.

To cancel: "End call"

Active calls

Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button on the radio during

the call, until the desired volume is reached.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Automatic volume equalization

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "Microphone" or "Speakers"

6. To adjust: turn the Controller.

7. To store: press the Controller.

Dialing a number

1. "Communication"

2. "Dial number"

3. Enter the numbers.

4. Select the symbol.

Holding, resuming

An active call can be put on hold and re-

sumed later on.

– "Hold/Resume"

Call is put on hold.

– "Hold/Resume"

Call is resumed.

Muting the microphone

When a call is active, the microphone can

be muted.

"Microphone"

The muted microphone is automatically ac-

tivated:

– When a new connection is established.

– When switching between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing

DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining

access to network services or for control-

ling devices, for instance to make a remote

inquiry of an answering machine. The

DTMF code is needed for this purpose.

1. "Keypad dialing"

2. Enter DTMF code.

Calls with multiple parties

General information

You can switch between calls or connect

two calls to a single conference call. These

functions must be supported by the mobile

phone and service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to

another party

If a second call comes in during an ongoing

call, a call waiting signal sounds where ap-

propriate.

"Accept"

Seite 241

Telephone COMMUNICATION

241

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The call is accepted and the existing call is

put on hold.

Establishing a second call

An additional call can be established while a

call is active.

1. "Contacts"

2. Select new number.

The call is started and the first call is put

on hold.

Switching between two calls, hold call

You can switch between two calls.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Resume"

The call on hold is resumed.

Establishing a conference call

Two calls can be connected to a single tele-

phone conference call. The calls must be

made from the same mobile phone.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Conference call"

Hands-free system

General information

Calls that are being made on the hands-free

system can be continued on the mobile

phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands-

free system

Calls that were begun outside of the Blue-

tooth range of the vehicle can be continued

on the hands-free system with standby state

or the ignition switched on. The vehicle key

must be located in the vehicle for this to

work.

Depending on the mobile phone, the system

automatically switches to the hands-free

system.

If the system does not switch over automat-

ically, follow the instructions on the display

of the mobile phone. Refer also to the own-

er's manual of the mobile phone.

From the hands-free system to the

mobile phone

Calls that are made on the hands-free sys-

tem can in some cases be continued on the

mobile phone; this depends on the mobile

phone.

Follow the instructions on the display of the

mobile phone. Refer also to the owner's

manual of the mobile phone.

Contacts

General information

Contacts from the mobile phone are trans-

ferred and displayed. Contact pictures can

be displayed, if the mobile phone supports

this function.

Displaying all contacts

1. "Communication"

2. "Contacts"

The contacts are listed in alphabetical

order. Depending on the number of con-

tacts, contact search and quick search

are offered.

Contact search

Contact search is available with more than

30 contacts.

1. "Search"

2. Enter the letters.

The hits are displayed on the right side.

Seite 242

COMMUNICATION Telephone

242

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. Move the Controller to the right.

4. Select the contact to display it.

Quick search in lists

Quick search is available starting from

30 contacts. All letters, for which there are

entries, are displayed in alphabetical order

on the left of the Control Display.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right

quickly.

All letters, for which contacts are stored,

are displayed on the left.

2. Select the first letter of the desired con-

tact.

The first entry of the selected letter is

displayed.

Sorting contacts

Contact names can be displayed in a differ-

ent order. Depending on how the contacts

were stored on the mobile phone, the sort-

ing order of the contacts may differ from

the selected sorting order.

1. Press the button.

2. "Sort contacts"

3. "Last name" or "First name"

Voice command response

A connected smartphone can be used via

voice operation.

Activate voice command response on the

smartphone for this purpose.

Button on

the steering

wheel

Function

Press the button for at

least 3 seconds. Voice

command response is acti-

vated on the smartphone.

The symbol indicates that the voice

command response is active.

Seite 243

Telephone COMMUNICATION

243

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

MINI Connected

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys-

tems and communication devices while

driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-

sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is

a risk of accident. Only use the systems or

devices when the traffic situation allows.

As warranted, stop and use the systems

and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Teleservices

Concept

Teleservices are services that help to main-

tain vehicle mobility.

General information

The offering depends on the equipment ver-

sion of the vehicle and the country-specific

variant.

For further information on the available

services, the vehicle manufacturer recom-

mends contacting a service center or cus-

tomer support.

Teleservices can comprise the following

services:

– Service Request, refer to page 244.

– Teleservice Report, refer to page 245.

– Teleservice Battery Guard, refer to

page 245.

– Your dealer’s service center, refer to

page 245.

– Roadside Assistance, refer to page 294.

Requirements

– Active MINI Connected contract or

equipment version with intelligent

emergency call.

– Cellular network reception.

– Ignition or standby state is switched on.

Service Request

Automatic Service Request

The Teleservice data on the vehicle's serv-

ice notifications is sent automatically to the

service center by MINI prior to the service

deadline. If feasible, the service center will

contact the customer about arranging a

service appointment.

This way, the dealer’s service center can

plan the necessary work in advance. This

shortens the duration of the service ap-

pointment.

Seite 244

COMMUNICATION MINI Connected

244

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Manual Service Request

Concept

Using a manually initiated Service Request,

data on the vehicle's service notifications is

directly sent by MINI to the service center.

If feasible, the service center will contact

the customer about arranging a service ap-

pointment.

General information

A Service Request can be started via a

Check Control message, refer to page 117.

Carry out service registration via the Check

Control message: "Service request".

Starting a Service Request

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "Teleservice Call"

Last Service Request

Concept

The last Service Request, for instance the

last report to the dealer’s service center, can

be displayed on the Control Display.

Displaying the last Service Request

Check to see when the last Service Request

was transmitted.

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Teleservice Call"

Teleservice Report

Concept

Transmits technical data that is evaluated

for the ongoing development of MINI prod-

ucts from the vehicle to MINI in regular in-

tervals, if needed.

General information

The Teleservice Report is free of charge and

is activated in vehicles that meet the follow-

ing requirements:

– Certain technical requirements are met.

– Active MINI Connected contract.

– Equipped with intelligent emergency

call.

Neither personal data nor position data is

transmitted.

Teleservice Battery Guard

Concept

If the battery charge state falls below cer-

tain values, MINI will inform you or your

dealer’s service center directly as warranted

or the next time the vehicle is started.

General information

If necessary and possible, the dealer's serv-

ice center will contact you to arrange a

service appointment.

The Battery Guard Teleservice is available

on a country-specific basis and under the

following conditions:

– Certain technical requirements are met.

– Active MINI Connected contract.

– To receive information from the Battery

Guard Teleservice, your contact data

must be stored in the MINI Connected

customer portal.

Your dealer’s service center

Concept

The preset service center is displayed. It is

possible to contact the service center.

Seite 245

MINI Connected COMMUNICATION

245

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

General information

To use Service Partner management in the

vehicle, log in with the MINI Connected ac-

cess data in the MINI Connected customer

portal. In addition, your vehicle must be as-

signed to your account in the MINI Con-

nected customer portal.

Displaying service centers

The service center that is currently as-

signed to the vehicle is displayed as a con-

tact in the vehicle.

1. "MINI Connected" or

"Communication"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "Your service center" or select service

partner management if necessary.

The assigned service center is displayed

along with all its contact information.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

following functions are available in a con-

tact:

– Call contact.

Updating MINI Assist

Concept

Starts the manual update of all services

available in the vehicle.

Updating services

1. "MINI Connected"

2. Press the button.

3. "Update MINI Services"

Customer support

Concept

Contact customer support for information

on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling customer support

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "Customer support"

The customer support is displayed and a

voice connection is established. If a

voice connection is not established, dial

the number manually.

Seite 246

COMMUNICATION MINI Connected

246

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Seite 247

MINI Connected COMMUNICATION

247

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Refueling

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to

page 250, prior to refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than

30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer

have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are

not ensured anymore. There is a risk of

damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Fuel cap

Opening

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the

rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap

opens.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-

tached to the fuel filler flap.

Seite 248

MOBILITY Refueling

248

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Closing

Warning

The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be

jammed and crushed during closing. The

cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel

vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury

or risk of damage to property. Pay atten-

tion that the retaining strap is not jammed

or crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click.

2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it en-

gages.

Emergency unlocking

It may be necessary in certain situations to

unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for in-

stance with an electrical fault.

Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Follow the following when re-

fueling

General information

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle

completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the

fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:

– Premature switching off.

– Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle

clicks off the first time.

Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop-

erly after refueling, otherwise the emissions

warning light may light up.

Follow safety regulations posted at the gas

station.

Safety information

NOTICE

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling

of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys-

tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by

contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm

the environment. There is a risk of damage

to property. Avoid overfilling.

Seite 249

Refueling MOBILITY

249

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Fuel recommendation

General information

Depending on the region, many gas stations

sell fuel that has been customized to winter

or summer conditions. Fuel that is available

in winter, for instance helps make a cold

start easier.

Gasoline

General information

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline

should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur

content.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as

containing metal must not be used.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of

25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu-

eling.

Ethanol should meet the following quality

standards:

US: ASTM 4806–xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx

xx: comply with the current standard in

each case.

Safety information

NOTICE

Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or

wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel

system and engine. Furthermore, the cata-

lytic converter is permanently damaged.

There is a risk of damage to property. Do

not refuel or add the following in the case

of gasoline engines:

– Leaded gasoline.

– Metallic additives, for instance man-

ganese or iron.

Do not press the Start/Stop button after

refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a

dealer’s service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system

and the engine. There is a risk of damage

to property. Do not use fuels with a higher

percentage of ethanol than recommended.

Do not refuel with fuels containing metha-

nol, e.g. M5 to M100.

NOTICE

Fuel that does not comply with the mini-

mum quality can compromise engine func-

tion or cause engine damage. There is a

risk of damage to property. Do not fill with

fuel that does not comply with the mini-

mum quality.

Seite 250

MOBILITY Fuel

250

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

CAUTION

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in

harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-

tionally, problems relating to drivability,

starting and stalling, especially under cer-

tain environmental conditions such as

high ambient temperature and high alti-

tude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered,

we recommend switching to a high quality

gasoline brand and a higher octane grade

— AKI number — for a few tank fills. To

avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly

recommended to purchase gasoline from

Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommenda-

tions may result in the need for unsched-

uled maintenance.

Recommended fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 91.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 93.

Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the

rated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 89.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 91.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI

Rating, the engine may produce knocking

sounds when starting at high external tem-

peratures. This has no effect on the engine

life.

Seite 251

Fuel MOBILITY

251

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Tire inflation pressure

General information

The tire characteristics and tire inflation

pressure influence the following:

– The service life of the tires.

– Road safety.

– Driving comfort.

– Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning

A tire with too little or no tire inflation

pressure may heat up significantly and

sustain damage. This will have a negative

impact on aspects of handling, such as

steering and braking response. There is a

risk of accident. Regularly check the tire

inflation pressure, and correct it as

needed, for instance twice a month and be-

fore a long trip.

Tire inflation pressure

specifications

In the tire inflation pressure table

The tire inflation pressure table, refer to

page 254, contains all tire inflation pres-

sure specifications for the specified tire

sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire

inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes

approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle

for the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pres-

sure, please note the following:

– Tire sizes of your vehicle.

– Maximum permitted driving speed.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information

Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla-

tion pressure increases with the tire tem-

perature.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire

inflation pressure.

The displays of inflation devices may under-

read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressure

specifications in the tire inflation

pressure table

The tire inflation pressure specifications in

the tire inflation pressure table only relate

to cold tires or tires at the same tempera-

ture as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levels

when the tires are cold, i.e.:

– Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km

has not been exceeded.

Seite 252

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

252

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

– If the vehicle has not moved again for at

least 2 hours after a trip.

1. Determine the intended tire inflation

pressure levels for the mounted tires.

2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all

four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-

ample.

3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the

actual tire inflation pressure deviates

from the intended tire inflation pres-

sure.

4. Check whether all valve caps are

screwed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflation

pressure

For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.

For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset

the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Checking the tire inflation pressure of

the emergency wheel

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the

emergency wheel in the cargo area regu-

larly, and correct it as needed.

Tire pressures up to 100 mph/

160 km/h

For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and

for optimum driving comfort, note the pres-

sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta-

ble, refer to page 254, and adjust as neces-

sary.

These pressure values can also be found on

the tire inflation pressure label on the driv-

er's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/

160 km/h.

Seite 253

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

253

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tire pressure values up to

100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER, COOPER ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications

in bar/PSI with

cold tires

225/55 R 17 97

H A/S

225/55 R 17 97

H M+S

225/50 R 18 95

V A/S

225/50 R 18 95

225/50 R 18 99

W XL

205/65 R 16 95

H M+S

225/50 R 18 95

H M+S

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

225/45 R 19 92

225/45 R 19 96

W XL

225/45 R 19 96

Y XL

205/60 R 17 93

H M+S

205/55 R 18 96

H XL M+S

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

Emergency

wheel

T 115/95 R 17

95 M

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications

in bar/PSI with

cold tires

225/50 R 18

95 V A/S

225/50 R 18

95 W

225/55 R 17

97 H M+S

225/50 R 18

95 H M+S

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

Seite 254

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

254

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

225/45 R 19

96 Y XL

205/60 R 17

93 H M+S

205/55 R 18

96 H XL M+S

225/45 R 19

92 W

225/45 R 19

96 W XL

2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36

Emergency

wheel

T 115/95 R 17

95 M

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications

in bar/PSI

with cold tires

225/50 R 18

95 V A/S

225/50 R 18

95 W

225/50 R 18

95 H M+S

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

225/45 R 19

92 W

205/55 R 18

96 H XL M+S

2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38

Tire inflation pressures at max.

speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Warning

In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-

cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob-

serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres-

sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/

160 km/h from the relevant table on the

following pages. Otherwise, tire damage

and accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for

optimum driving comfort, note the pressure

values in the tire inflation pressure table,

refer to page 256, and adjust as necessary.

Seite 255

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

255

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tire inflation pressure values over

100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER, COOPER ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications

in bar/PSI with

cold tires

225/55 R 17 97

H A/S

225/55 R 17 97

H M+S

225/50 R 18 95

V A/S

225/50 R 18 95

225/50 R 18 99

W XL

205/65 R 16 95

H M+S

225/50 R 18 95

H M+S

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

225/45 R 19 92

225/45 R 19 96

W XL

225/45 R 19 96

Y XL

205/60 R 17 93

H M+S

2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

205/55 R 18 96

H XL M+S

2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39

Emergency

wheel

T 115/95 R 17

95 M

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications

in bar/PSI with

cold tires

225/50 R 18

95 V A/S

225/50 R 18

95 W

225/55 R 17

97 H M+S

225/50 R 18

95 H M+S

225/45 R 19

96 Y XL

205/60 R 17

93 H M+S

205/55 R 18

96 H XL M+S

2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41

225/45 R 19

92 W

225/45 R 19

96 W XL

3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44

Emergency

wheel

T 115/95 R 17

95 M

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

Seite 256

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

256

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications

in bar/PSI

with cold tires

225/50 R 18

95 V A/S

225/50 R 18

95 W

225/50 R 18

95 H M+S

2.9 / 42 2.9 / 42

225/45 R 19

92 W

205/55 R 18

96 H XL M+S

3.1 / 45 3.1 / 45

Tire identification marks

Tire size

205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Maximum tire load

Maximum tire load is the maximum permis-

sible weight for which the tire is approved.

Locate the maximum tire load on the tire

sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating

– GAWR – on the certification label on the

driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by

1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the

vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating –

GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire

loads, respectively.

Speed letter

Designation Maximum speed

Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h

S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0120

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

0120: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines

of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation

Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at

least every 6 years.

Manufacture date

You can find the manufacture date of the

tire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT … 0120 1st week 2020

Seite 257

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

257

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applica-

ble on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width.

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-

ture A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to

Federal Safety Requirements in addition to

these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. E.g., a

tire graded 150 would wear one and one-

half, 1 g, times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100. The relative

performance of tires depends upon the ac-

tual conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm due

to variations in driving habits, service prac-

tices and differences in road characteristics

and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured under

controlled conditions on specified govern-

ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction per-

formance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest,

B, and C, representing the tire's resistance

to the generation of heat and its ability to

dissipate heat when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to degenerate

and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-

ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of perform-

ance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

Warning

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-

derinflation, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC – Run-flat tires

Run-flat tires, refer to page 261, are labeled

with a circular symbol containing the let-

ters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires with better cold

weather performance than summer tires.

Seite 258

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

258

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tire tread

Summer tires

Do not drive with a tire tread of less than

0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in-

creased risk of hydroplaning.

Winter tires

Do not drive with a tire tread of less than

0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable

for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the

tire's circumference and have the legally re-

quired minimum height of 0.063 in-

ches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators are

marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread

Wear Indicator.

Tire damage

General information

Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for-

eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread

wear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfa-

ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta-

cles can cause serious damage to wheels,

tires and suspension parts. This is more

likely to occur with low-profile tires, which

provide less cushioning between the wheel

and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz-

ards and reduce your speed, especially if

your vehicle is equipped with low-profile

tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle

malfunctions:

– Unusual vibrations.

– Unusual tire or running noises.

– Unusual handling such as a strong ten-

dency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by the following sit-

uations, for instance:

– Driving over curbs.

– Road damage.

– Tire inflation pressure too low.

– Vehicle overloading.

– Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-

sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-

trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-

age is suspected while driving,

immediately reduce speed and stop. Have

wheels and tires checked. For this pur-

pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed

or transported as needed. Do not repair

damaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning

Tires can become damaged by driving over

obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at

high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller

tire cross-section. The smaller the tire

cross-section, the higher the risk of tire

Seite 259

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

259

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

damage. There is a danger of accidents and

property damage. If possible, avoid driving

over objects or road conditions that may

damage tires, or drive over them slowly

and carefully.

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing

Have mounting and tire and wheel balanc-

ing carried out by a dealer’s service center

or another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General information

You can ask the dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop about the correct wheel/tire combina-

tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Wheels and tires which are not suitable

for your vehicle can damage parts of the

vehicle, for instance due to contact with

the body due to tolerances despite the

same official size rating. There is a risk of

an accident. The manufacturer of your ve-

hicle strongly suggests that you use

wheels and tires that have been recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer for

your vehicle type.

Warning

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will

have a negative impact on the vehicle's

handling and on the function of a variety

of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Brak-

ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con-

trol. There is a risk of accident. To main-

tain good handling and vehicle response,

use only tires with a single tread configu-

ration from a single manufacturer. The

manufacturer of the vehicle recommends

that you use wheels and tires that have

been recommended by the vehicle manu-

facturer for your vehicle type. Following

tire damage, have the original wheel/tire

combination remounted on the vehicle as

soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the

vehicle recommends certain tire brands.

The tire brands can be identified by a star

on the tire sidewall.

New tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-

turing circumstances when tires are brand-

new; they achieve their full traction poten-

tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first

200 miles/300 km.

Seite 260

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

260

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Retreaded tires

Warning

Retreaded tires can have different tire cas-

ing structures. With advanced age the

service life can be limited. There is a risk

of an accident. The manufacturer of your

vehicle does not recommend the use of re-

treaded tires.

The manufacturer of the vehicle does not

recommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tires

Winter tires are recommended for operat-

ing on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro-

vide better winter traction than summer

tires, they usually do not provide the same

level of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is

higher than the permissible speed for the

winter tires, then attach a label showing the

permissible maximum speed in the field of

view. The label is available from a dealer's

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and do

not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tires

For your own safety, use only runflat tires.

Further information is available from a deal-

er's service center or another qualified serv-

ice center or repair shop.

Rotating wheels between axles

Different wear patterns can occur on the

front and rear axles depending on individual

driving conditions. The tires can be rotated

in pairs between the axles to achieve even

wear. Further information is available from

a dealer's service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop. After rotating,

check the tire pressure and correct, if

needed.

Storing tires

Tire inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation

pressure indicated on the side wall of the

tire.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and

dark place.

Always protect tires against all contact with

oil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires

Concept

Run-flat tires permit continued driving un-

der restricted conditions even in the event

of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General information

The wheels are composed of tires that are

self-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire

to remain drivable to a restricted degree in

the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driv-

ing with a flat tire.

Seite 261

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

261

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a

run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire

pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-

ity when braking, braking distances are

longer and the self-steering properties will

change. There is a risk of accident. Drive

moderately and do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

Label

The tires are marked on the tire sidewall

with RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety measures

– Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

– Switch on the hazard warning system.

– Secure the vehicle against rolling away

by setting the parking brake.

– Turn the steering wheel until the front

wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-

tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the

vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place,

such as behind a guardrail.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangle

at an appropriate distance.

Mobility System

Concept

With the Mobility System, minor tire dam-

age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-

tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is

pumped into the tires, which seals the dam-

age from the inside.

General information

– Follow the instructions on using the

Mobility System found on the compres-

sor and sealant container.

– Use of the Mobility System may be inef-

fective if the tire puncture measures ap-

prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.

– Contact a dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair

shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.

– Do not remove foreign bodies that have

penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign

objects if they are visibly protruding

from the tire.

– Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-

ant container and apply it to the steer-

ing wheel.

– The use of a sealant can damage the

TPM wheel electronics. In this case,

have the TPM wheel electronics re-

placed at the next opportunity.

– The compressor can be used to check

the tire inflation pressure.

Seite 262

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

262

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

Storage

The Mobility System is located in a bag on

the right side trim in the cargo area.

Sealant container

– Sealant container, arrow 1.

– Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant con-

tainer.

Compressor

1 Sealant container unlocking

2 Sealant container holder

3 Tire pressure gage

4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button

5 On/off switch

6 Compressor

7 Connector/cable for socket

8 Connection hose

Safety measures

– Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

– Switch on the hazard warning system.

– Secure the vehicle against rolling away

by setting the parking brake.

– Turn the steering wheel until the front

wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-

tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the

vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place,

such as behind a guardrail.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangle

at an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-

tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases

can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust

gases contain pollutants which are color-

less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-

haust gases can also accumulate outside of

the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep

the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient

ventilation.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during ex-

tended operation. There is a risk of dam-

age to property. Do not run the compres-

sor for more than 10 minutes.

Seite 263

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

263

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Filling

1. Shake the sealant container.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the

cover of the sealant container. Do not

kink the hose.

3. Slide the sealant container into the

holder on the compressor housing, en-

suring that it engages audibly.

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con-

tainer onto the tire valve of the non-

working wheel.

5. With the compressor switched off, in-

sert the plug into the power socket in-

side the vehicle.

6. With the ignition switched on or the en-

gine running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes

to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a

tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant,

the tire inflation pressure may sporadically

reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the

compressor at this point.

Seite 264

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

264

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Checking and adjusting the tire

inflation pressure

Checking

1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the

tire pressure gage.

To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-

sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant

container

1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant

container from the tire valve.

2. Press the red unlocking device.

3. Remove the sealant container from the

compressor.

4. Wrap and store the sealant container in

suitable material to avoid dirtying the

cargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not

reached

1. Pull the connector out of the power

socket inside the vehicle.

2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to

distribute the sealant in the tire.

3. Screw the connection hose of the com-

pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

4. Insert the connector into the power

socket inside the vehicle.

5. With the ignition switched on or the en-

gine running, switch on the compressor.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least

2 bar cannot be reached, contact your

dealer's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least

2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-

tion pressure is reached.

6. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.

7. Pull the connector out of the power

socket inside the vehicle.

8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is

reached

1. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.

2. Pull the connector out of the power

socket inside the vehicle.

3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

4. Immediately drive approx.

5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant

is evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

If possible, do not drive at speeds less

than 12 mph/20 km/h.

Seite 265

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

265

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjustment

1. Stop at a suitable location.

2. Screw the connection hose of the com-

pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

3. Insert the connector into the power

socket inside the vehicle.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at

least 2.0 bar.

– Increase tire inflation pressure: with

the ignition switched on or the en-

gine running, switch on the com-

pressor.

– Reduce tire inflation pressure: press

the button on the compressor.

5. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.

6. Pull the connector out of the power

socket inside the vehicle.

7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to

page 146.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to

page 142.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant

container of the Mobility System promptly.

Snow chains

General information

The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter-

mined certain wheels and tires to be suita-

ble for operation on the vehicle.

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's in-

structions.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after

mounting snow chains, as doing so may re-

sult in incorrect readings.

Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

after mounting snow chains, as doing so

may result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly ac-

tivate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if

needed.

Safety information

Warning

With the mounting of snow chains on un-

suitable tires, the snow chains can come

into contact with vehicle parts. There may

be a risk of accident or risk of damage to

property. Only mount snow chains on tires

that are designated by their manufacturer

as suitable for the use of snow chains.

Seite 266

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

266

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning

Insufficiently tight snow chains may dam-

age tires and vehicle components. There

may be a risk of accident or risk of damage

to property. Make sure that the snow

chains are always sufficiently tight. Re-

tighten as needed according to the snow

chain manufacturer's instructions.

Fine-link snow chains

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-

mends the use of fine-link snow chains. Cer-

tain types of fine-link snow chains have

been tested by the manufacturer of the ve-

hicle and recommended as road-safe and

suitable.

Information regarding suitable snow chains

is available from a dealer’s service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Use

Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equip-

ped with the tires of the following size:

– 205/60 R 17.

– 205/55 R 18.

John Cooper Works:

– 205/60 R 17.

– 205/55 R 18.

Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h

when using snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General information

When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a

wheel does not always need to be changed

immediately when there is a loss of tire in-

flation pressure due to a flat tire.

If needed, the tools for changing wheels are

available as accessories from a dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

The vehicle jack is only provided for short-

term lifting of the vehicle for wheel

changes. Even if all safety measures are

observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi-

cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the

vehicle and do not start the engine.

DANGER

Supports such as wooden blocks under the

vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve-

hicle jack to bear weight. They have the

potential to exert too much strain on the

vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the

vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or

danger to life. Do not place supports under

the vehicle jack.

Warning

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac-

turer, is provided in order to perform a

wheel change in the event of a breakdown.

The jack is not designed for frequent use;

for example, changing from summer to

winter tires. Using the jack frequently may

cause it to become jammed or damaged.

There is a risk of injury and risk of damage

to property. Only use the jack to attach an

emergency or spare wheel in the event of

a breakdown.

Seite 267

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

267

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-

ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack

can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If

possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid,

and slip-resistant surface.

Warning

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting

the vehicle and for the jacking points on

the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.

Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using

the vehicle jack.

Warning

When the vehicle jack is not inserted into

the jacking point provided for this pur-

pose, the vehicle may be damaged or the

vehicle jack may slip when it is being

cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. When cranking up

the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted

in the jacking point next to the wheel

housing.

Warning

A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack

may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are

exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and

risk of damage to property. While the ve-

hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces

on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi-

cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal-

er’s service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General information

The vehicle manufacturer recommends to

additionally secure the vehicle against roll-

ing away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects

in front and behind the wheel that is diago-

nal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

If you need to change a wheel on a slight

downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-

able objects, for instance a rock, under the

wheels of both the front and rear axles

against the rolling direction.

Seite 268

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

268

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Lug bolt lock

Concept

The wheel lug bolts have a special coding.

The lug bolts can only be released with the

adapter which matches the coding.

Overview

The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in

the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to

page 284.

– Lug bolt, arrow 1.

– Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing

1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.

2. Unscrew the lug bolt.

3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing

the lug bolt.

Screwing on

1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If

necessary, turn the adapter until it fits

on the lug bolt.

2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening

torque is 140 Nm.

3. Remove the adapter and stow it after

screwing on the lug bolt.

Preparing the vehicle

– Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip

ground at a safe distance from traffic.

– Switch on the hazard warning system.

– Set the parking brake.

– Engage a gear or move the selector lever

to position P.

– As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,

have all vehicle occupants get out of the

vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place,

such as behind a guardrail.

– Depending on the vehicle equipment,

get wheel change tools and, if necessary,

the emergency wheel from the vehicle.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangle

or portable hazard warning light at an

appropriate distance.

– Secure the vehicle additionally against

rolling.

– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are

located at the marked positions.

Seite 269

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

269

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Jacking up the vehicle

Warning

Hands and fingers can be jammed when

using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of

injury. Comply with the described hand

position and do not change this position

while using the vehicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-

row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank

or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan-

gular recess of the jacking point closest

to the wheel to be changed.

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the

vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

4. Take your hand away from the vehicle

jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under

load and continue turning the vehicle

jack crank or lever with one hand.

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot

stands vertically and at a right angle be-

neath the jacking point.

6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot

stands vertically and perpendicularly be-

neath the jacking point after extending

the vehicle jack.

7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle

jack is with the entire surface on the

Seite 270

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

270

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

ground and the relevant wheel is maxi-

mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.

Mounting a wheel

Mount one emergency wheel only, as re-

quired.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.

3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel

on and screw in at least two lug bolts in

a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.

If non-original light-alloy wheels of the

vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the

accompanying lug bolts may have to be

used as well.

4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts

and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-

wise pattern.

5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-

clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and

lower the vehicle.

6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se-

curely.

After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The

tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.

2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo

area, if necessary.

The nonworking wheel cannot be stored

under the cargo floor panel because of

its size.

3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next

opportunity and correct as needed.

4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are

tight with a calibrated torque wrench.

6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the

nearest dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair

shop.

Emergency wheel

Concept

In the event of a flat tire, the emergency

wheel can be used in place of the wheel

with the defective tire. The emergency

wheel is only intended for temporary use

until the defective tire/wheel has been re-

placed.

General information

Mount one emergency wheel only.

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the

emergency wheel in the cargo area regu-

larly, and correct it as needed.

Safety information

Warning

The emergency wheel has particular di-

mensions. When driving with an emer-

gency wheel, changed driving properties

may occur, for instance reduced lane sta-

bility when braking, longer braking dis-

tance, and changed self-steering proper-

ties in the limit area. There is a risk of

accident. Drive moderately and do not ex-

ceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Seite 271

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

271

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

The emergency wheel and the wheel change

tools are located in the cargo area under the

cargo floor panel.

Removing the emergency wheel

1. Pull up and remove the cargo floor

panel.

2. Unscrew the butterfly screw.

3. Remove the retaining plate or the cover.

4. Where applicable, remove the holder

and the trailer hitch.

5. Remove the jacking point and the tool

holder on the left next to the emergency

wheel.

6. Slide the emergency wheel to the left

and remove it.

Inserting the emergency wheel

1. Insert the emergency wheel on the left

and slide it to the right.

2. Where applicable, mount the holder and

the trailer hitch.

3. Attach the retaining plate or the cover.

4. Screw on and tighten the butterfly

screw.

5. Insert and secure the jacking point and

the tool holder on the left next to the

emergency wheel.

6. Insert the cargo floor panel.

Seite 272

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

272

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid

2 Vehicle identification number

3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

5 Jump-starting, negative terminal

6 Coolant reservoir

Seite 273

Engine compartment MOBILITY

273

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Hood

Safety information

Warning

Improperly executed work in the engine

compartment can damage vehicle compo-

nents and impair vehicle functions. There

is a risk of an accident and damage to

property. Have work in the engine com-

partment performed by a dealer’s service

center or another qualified service center

or repair shop.

Warning

The engine compartment accommodates

moving components. Certain components

in the engine compartment can also move

with the vehicle switched off, for instance

the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.

Do not reach into the area of moving parts.

Keep articles of clothing and hair away

from moving parts.

Warning

There are protruding parts, for instance

locking hook, on the inside of the hood.

There is a risk of injury. If the hood is

open, pay attention to protruding parts

and keep clear of these areas.

Warning

An incorrectly locked hood can open while

driving and restrict visibility. There is a

risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor-

rectly close the hood.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when opening

and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-

jury. Make sure that the area of movement

of the hood is clear during opening and

closing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when

the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-

age to property. Make sure that the wipers

with the wiper blades mounted are folded

down onto the windshield before opening

the hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engage

on both sides. Pressing again can damage

the hood. There is a risk of damage to

property. Open the hood again and then

close it energetically. Avoid pressing

again.

Opening the hood

1. Pull lever, arrow 1.

Hood is unlocked.

2. After the lever is released, pull the lever

again, arrow 2.

Hood can be opened.

Seite 274

MOBILITY Engine compartment

274

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Indicator/warning lights

When the hood is opened, a Check Control

message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Seite 275

Engine compartment MOBILITY

275

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Engine oil

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

The engine oil consumption is dependent on

your driving style and driving conditions.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil

level after refueling by taking a detailed

measurement.

The engine oil consumption can increase in

the following situations, for instance:

– Sporty driving style.

– Break-in of the engine.

– Idling of the engine.

– With use of engine oil types that are

classified as not suitable.

Different Check Control messages appear,

depending on the engine oil level.

Safety information

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes

engine damage. There is a risk of damage

to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en-

gine or the catalytic converter. There is a

risk of damage to property. Do not add too

much engine oil. When too much engine

oil is added, have the engine oil level cor-

rected by a dealer’s service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair

shop.

Electronic oil measurement

General information

The electronic oil measurement has two

measuring principles:

– Monitoring.

– Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance trips

or using a dynamic driving style, for in-

stance when taking curves aggressively,

regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Monitoring

Concept

The engine oil level is monitored electroni-

cally while driving and can be shown on the

Control Display.

Seite 276

MOBILITY Engine oil

276

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

If the engine oil level is outside its permis-

sible operating range, a Check Control mes-

sage is displayed.

A red indicator light indicates that

the engine oil pressure is too low.

Functional requirements

A current measured value is available after

approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil level

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

System limits

When making frequent short-distance trips

or using a dynamic driving style, it may not

be possible to calculate a measured value.

In this case, the measured value for the last,

sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

Concept

The engine oil level is checked when the ve-

hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.

If the engine oil level is outside its permis-

sible operating range, a Check Control mes-

sage is displayed.

General information

During the measurement, the idle speed is

increased somewhat.

Functional requirements

– Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-

tion.

– Manual transmission: shift lever in neu-

tral position, clutch and accelerator ped-

als not depressed.

– Steptronic transmission: selector lever

in selector lever position N or P and ac-

celerator pedal not depressed.

– Engine is running and is at operating

temperature.

Performing a detailed measurement

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

4. "Measure engine oil level"

5. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and dis-

played via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General information

Only add engine oil when the message is

displayed in the instrument cluster. The

quantity to be added is indicated in the

message displayed in the instrument clus-

ter.

Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer

to page 279.

Safely park the vehicle and switch off the

ignition before adding engine oil.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Seite 277

Engine oil MOBILITY

277

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Operating materials, for instance oils,

greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm-

ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries

or danger to life. Follow the instructions

on the containers. Avoid the contact of ar-

ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat-

ing materials. Do not refill operating mate-

rials into different bottles. Store operating

materials out of reach of children.

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes

engine damage. There is a risk of damage

to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en-

gine or the catalytic converter. There is a

risk of damage to property. Do not add too

much engine oil. When too much engine

oil is added, have the engine oil level cor-

rected by a dealer’s service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair

shop.

Overview

The oil filler neck is located in the engine

compartment, refer to page 273.

Adding engine oil

1. Open the hood, refer to page 274.

2. Open the lid counterclockwise.

3. Add engine oil.

4. Close the lid.

Engine oil types to add

General information

The engine oil quality is critical for the life

of the engine.

Only add the types of engine oil which are

listed.

Safety information

NOTICE

Oil additives can damage the engine.

There is a risk of damage to property. Do

not use oil additives.

NOTICE

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc-

tions in the engine or damage it. There is a

risk of damage to property. When select-

ing an engine oil, make sure that the en-

gine oil has the correct oil rating.

Seite 278

MOBILITY Engine oil

278

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Suitable engine oil types

Add engine oils that meet the following oil

rating standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

BMW Longlife-17 FE+.

Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use

is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an

engine oil with the following oil rating can

be added:

Oil rating

API SL.

API SM.

API SN.

Viscosity grades

When selecting an engine oil, make sure

that the engine oil belongs to one of the fol-

lowing viscosity grades:

Viscosity grades

SAE 0W-20.

SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable oil ratings

and viscosity grades of engine oils can be

requested from a dealer’s service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Engine oil change

NOTICE

Engine oil that is not changed in timely

fashion can cause increased engine wear

and thus engine damage. There is a risk of

damage to property. It is recommended

that you do not exceed the service inter-

vals indicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that

you have a dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop

change the engine oil.

Seite 279

Engine oil MOBILITY

279

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Coolant

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are

suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi-

tives of different colors. Observe the water -

additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information

about suitable additives is available from a

dealer’s service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

With the engine hot and the cooling sys-

tem open, coolant can escape and lead to

scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only

open the cooling system with the engine

cooled down.

Warning

Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-

tives can damage the engine. There is a

risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-

erty. Do not allow additives to come into

contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth-

ing. Use suitable additives only.

Coolant level

Checking

There are yellow Min and Max marks in the

coolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood, refer to page 274.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir

slightly counterclockwise to allow any

excess pressure to dissipate, then open

it.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

Seite 280

MOBILITY Coolant

280

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be-

tween the minimum and maximum

marks in the filler neck.

6. Close the lid.

Adding coolant

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood, refer to page 274.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir

slightly counterclockwise to allow any

excess pressure to dissipate, then open

it.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant

up to the specified level; do not overfill.

6. Close the lid.

7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-

nated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environ-

mental protection regulations when

disposing of coolant and coolant ad-

ditives.

Seite 281

Coolant MOBILITY

281

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system provides service

notifications and thereby provides support

in maintaining road safety and the opera-

tional reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of the

maintenance system may vary according to

the country version. Replacement work,

spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear

materials are calculated separately. Further

information is available from a dealer's serv-

ice center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS

Concept

Sensors and special algorithms take into ac-

count the driving conditions of the vehicle.

CBS uses these to calculate the need for

maintenance.

The system makes it possible to adapt the

amount of maintenance corresponding to

your user profile.

General information

Information on service notifications, refer

to page 123, can be displayed on the Control

Display.

Service data in the vehicle key

Information on the service notifications is

continuously stored in the vehicle key. The

service center can read this data out and

suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi-

cle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve-

hicle key with which the vehicle was driven

most recently.

Storage periods

Storage periods during which the vehicle

battery was disconnected are not taken into

account.

If this occurs, have a dealer's service center

or another qualified service center or repair

shop update the time-dependent mainte-

nance procedures, such as checking brake

fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine

oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal

filter.

Maintenance Manual and

Service and Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet for US models

and Warranty and Service

Guide Booklet for Canadian

models

Please consult your Maintenance Manual

and Service and Warranty Information

Booklet for US models and Warranty and

Seite 282

MOBILITY Maintenance

282

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

for additional information on the perform-

ance of service and maintenance work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends that maintenance and repair be per-

formed by a service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop. Records

of regular maintenance and repair work

should be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diag-

nosis

General information

Devices connected to the OBD socket trig-

ger the alarm system when the vehicle is

locked. Remove any devices connected at

the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-

tricate component intended to be used in

conjunction with specialized equipment to

check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-

tem. Improper use of the socket for On-

board Diagnosis, or contact with the

socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other

than its intended purpose, can cause vehi-

cle malfunctions and creates risks of per-

sonal and property damage. Given the fore-

going, the manufacture of your vehicle

strongly recommends that access to the

socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to

a dealer's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop or other

persons that have the specialized training

and equipment for purposes of properly

utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side

for checking the primary components in the

vehicle's emissions.

Emissions

– The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.

Have the vehicle checked as soon

as possible.

– The warning light flashes under certain

circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive

misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the

system checked immediately; otherwise,

serious engine misfiring within a brief

period can seriously damage emission

control components, in particular the

catalytic converter.

Seite 283

Maintenance MOBILITY

283

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Vehicle tool kit

The bag containing the onboard vehicle tool

kit is located beneath the cargo floor panel.

After use, secure the bag with the onboard

vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if the

wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade

installed. There is a risk of damage to

property. Hold the wiper firmly when

changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or

switch on the wiper without a wiper blade

installed.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when

the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-

age to property. Make sure that the wipers

with the wiper blades mounted are folded

down onto the windshield before opening

the hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades

1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the

wiper arms.

2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing out

the wiper blade, arrow 2.

Seite 284

MOBILITY Replacing components

284

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper

blade must engage audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Rear wiper blade

1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper

arm.

3. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper

blade must engage audibly.

4. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbs

Lights and bulbs make an essential contri-

bution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-

mends that you have appropriate work per-

formed by a dealer’s service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop

if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not

been described here.

A spare light box is available from a dealer's

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer to

page 285.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting

diodes installed behind a cover as a light

source. These light-emitting diodes are re-

lated to conventional lasers and are offi-

cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting

diodes.

Follow the safety information, refer to

page 285.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

Warning

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con-

tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There

is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after

they have cooled off.

Warning

Work on switched-on lighting systems can

cause short circuits. There is a risk of in-

jury or risk of damage to property. When

working on the lighting system, switch off

the lights in question. If necessary, heed

the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.

There is a risk of damage to property. Do

not hold new bulbs with your bare hands.

Use a clean cloth or something similar, or

hold the bulb by its base.

Seite 285

Replacing components MOBILITY

285

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Warning

Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-

age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of

injury. Do not look directly into the head-

lights or other light sources. Do not re-

move the LED covers.

Headlight glass

Condensation can form on the inside of the

headlight glass in cool or humid weather.

When driving with the lights switched on,

the condensation evaporates after a short

time. The headlight glass does not need to

be changed.

If despite driving with the headlights

switched on, increasing humidity forms, for

instance water droplets in the light, have

the headlights checked.

Headlight setting

The headlight adjustments can be affected

by changing lights and bulbs. After the

headlight adjustment was changed, have it

checked and, if necessary, corrected by a

dealer’s service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Front halogen lights, bulb

replacement

Overview

Halogen headlights

1 High beams

2 Low beams

3 Turn signal

High beams

Follow the general instructions on lights

and bulbs, refer to page 285.

55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Open the hood, refer to page 274.

2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re-

move.

Seite 286

MOBILITY Replacing components

286

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. Tilt the bulb holder up, arrow 1, and pull

it out of the headlight toward the rear,

arrow 2.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

5. Install the new bulb with the bulb

holder in reverse order of removal. In

doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor-

rectly positioned in the headlight hous-

ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en-

gages.

6. Check the position of the bulb through

the headlight glass.

7. Close the headlight housing with the lid.

Make sure that the lid engages.

Low beams

Follow the general instructions on lights

and bulbs, refer to page 285.

55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Turn the steering wheel.

– On the left facing the driving direc-

tion: turn the cover clockwise and

remove it.

– On the right facing the driving direc-

tion: turn the cover counterclock-

wise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock-

wise, and remove it.

4. Tilt the bulb holder down, arrow 1, and

pull it downward out of the headlight,

arrow 2.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

6. Install the new bulb with the bulb

holder in reverse order of removal. In

doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor-

rectly positioned in the headlight hous-

ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en-

gages.

Seite 287

Replacing components MOBILITY

287

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

7. Check the position of the bulb through

the headlight glass.

8. Install the covers. Make sure that the

covers engage.

Turn signal

Follow the general instructions on lights

and bulbs, refer to page 285.

24-watt bulb, PWY24W.

1. Turn the steering wheel.

– On the left facing the driving direc-

tion: turn the cover clockwise and

remove it.

– On the right facing the driving direc-

tion: turn the cover counterclock-

wise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock-

wise, and remove it.

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise,

arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

5. Press the bulb gently into the bulb

holder, turn counterclockwise and re-

move.

6. Insert the new bulb and install the cov-

ers in the reverse order. Make sure that

the covers engage.

LED front lights, bulb replacement

General information

The following lights feature LED technol-

ogy:

– Daytime running lights

– High beams

– Low beams

– Cornering light

– Parking lights

– Fog lights

In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal-

er's service center or another qualified serv-

ice center or repair shop.

Seite 288

MOBILITY Replacing components

288

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

Position of the headlights

1 Turn signal

2 Daytime running lights

3 Low beams/high beams

4 Cornering light

LED bug light

1 Parking lights

2 Fog lights

Turn signal

Follow the general instructions on lights

and bulbs, refer to page 285.

24-watt bulb, PWY24W.

1. Open the hood, refer to page 274.

2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re-

move.

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise,

arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

4. Press the bulb gently into the bulb

holder, turn counterclockwise and re-

move.

5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover

in the reverse order.

LED front fog lights

These front fog lights are made using LED

technology. In the case of a malfunction,

contact a dealer's service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 289

Replacing components MOBILITY

289

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

1 Side tail lights

2 Center brake light

3 License plate light

Side tail lights

1 Brake lights/tail lights

2 Turn signal

3 Reversing lights

Side LED tail lights

1 Brake light

2 Tail lights

3 Turn signal

4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights

Follow the general instructions on lights

and bulbs, refer to page 285.

– Bulb, brake lights/rear lights, tail lights:

P21W.

– Bulb, brake lights/LED tail lights:

H21W.

– Bulb, turn signals: P21W.

– Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove left or right cover.

3. Through the opening, loosen the plug

connector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.

Seite 290

MOBILITY Replacing components

290

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Press the latches together, arrows 1, and

remove the bulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the open-

ing.

5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into

the socket, turn counterclockwise and

remove.

– Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights

– Arrow 2: turn signal

– Arrow 3: reversing light

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert

the new bulb and attach the bulb holder.

Make sure that the bulb holder engages

in all fasteners.

Central brake light and license plate

lights

Follow the general instructions on lights

and bulbs, refer to page 285.

The lights feature LED technology. In the

case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Side turn signal, bulb replacement

Follow the general instructions on lights

and bulbs, refer to page 285.

Bulb: WY5W.

1. Push the side turn signal forward in the

driving direction, arrow 1, and swing it

outward, arrow 2.

– On the left facing the driving direc-

tion: turn the bulb holder clockwise

and remove.

– On the right facing the driving direc-

tion: turn the bulb holder counter-

clockwise and remove.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb holder.

5. Insert the rear side turn signal, arrow 1,

and swing it forward, arrow 2.

Vehicle battery

General information

The battery is maintenance-free.

Seite 291

Replacing components MOBILITY

291

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

More information about the battery can be

requested from a dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Safety information

Warning

Vehicle batteries that are not compatible

can damage vehicle systems and impair

vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac-

cident and damage to property. Only vehi-

cle batteries that are compatible with your

vehicle type should be installed in your ve-

hicle. Information on compatible vehicle

batteries is available at your dealer’s serv-

ice center.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-

mends that you have a service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop

after the battery has been replaced. Once

the battery has been registered again, all

comfort features will be available without

restriction and any Check Control messages

displayed which relate to comfort features

will disappear.

Charging the battery

General information

Make sure that the battery is always suffi-

ciently charged to guarantee that the bat-

tery remains usable for its full service life.

A discharged battery is indicated by

a red indicator light.

Charge the battery in the following situa-

tions:

– When the inspection glass on the top of

the battery is black.

– When the take-off performance is insuf-

ficient.

The following circumstances can have a

negative effect on the performance of the

battery:

– Frequent short-distance drives.

– The vehicle is not used for more than a

month.

Safety information

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery

can work with high voltages and currents,

which means that the 12 volt on-board

network can be overloaded or damaged.

There is a risk of damage to property. Only

connect battery chargers for the vehicle

battery to the starting aid terminals in the

engine compartment.

Charging the battery

Charge the battery only when the engine is

off and via the starting aid terminals, refer

to page 297, in the engine compartment.

Power failure

After a power loss, some equipment needs

to be newly initialized or individual settings

updated, for example:

– Memory function: store the positions

again.

– Time: update.

– Date: update.

– Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Seite 292

MOBILITY Replacing components

292

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by a

dealer’s service center or another

qualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the filled battery in an upright po-

sition for transport and storage. Secure the

battery so that it does not tip over during

transport.

Fuses

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload

electrical lines and components. There is a

risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a

blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking

fuse with a substitute of another color or

amperage rating.

Accessing the fuses

The fuses are located in the glove compart-

ment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations,

as well as the positions of any other fuse

boxes, is available on the Internet:

www.mini.com/fusecard.

Where applicable, information on the fuse

types and locations is also found on a sepa-

rate sheet in the fuse box.

Replacing fuses

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that

you have a dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop

replace the fuses.

Seite 293

Replacing components MOBILITY

293

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis-

play.

The red light in the button flashes when the

hazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tail-

gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit

General information

Some of the articles have a limited service

life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents

regularly and replace any expired items

promptly.

Storage

The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept

MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted

if assistance is needed in the event of a

breakdown.

Seite 294

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

294

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

General information

In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve-

hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man-

ufacturer.

There are various ways of making contact.

– Via a Check Control message, refer to

page 117.

– Calling with a mobile phone.

Requirements

– Active MINI Connected contract or

equipment version with intelligent

emergency call.

– Cellular network reception.

– The ignition is switched on.

Starting

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,

support is offered through Teleservice Diag-

nosis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the Roadside Assistance

of the manufacture is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if

needed. Select to dial the telephone

number on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice Diagnosis

Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless

transmission of detailed vehicle data that is

important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is

transmitted automatically.

Teleservice Help

Depending on the country, the Teleservice

Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of

the vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by re-

questing it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Control Display is switched on.

4. Confirm Teleservice Help.

The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-

stored for specific functions.

If this is not possible, further measures will

be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-

tance will be informed.

Emergency Request

Intelligent emergency call

Concept

In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re-

quest can be triggered automatically by the

system or manually.

General information

Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

The Intelligent Assist system establishes a

connection with the MINI Response Center.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Re-

quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora-

ble conditions.

Seite 295

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

295

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

SOS button in the roofliner

Functional requirements

– The ignition is switched on.

– The Assist system is functional.

– If the vehicle is equipped with intelli-

gent emergency call: the SIM card

integrated in the vehicle has been acti-

vated.

Automatic triggering

Under certain conditions, for instance if the

airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is

automatically initiated immediately after an

accident of corresponding severity. Auto-

matic Collision Notification is not affected

by pressing the SOS button.

Manual triggering

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED at

the button lights up green.

– The LED is illuminated green when an

Emergency Request has been initiated.

If the situation allows, wait in your vehi-

cle until the voice connection has been

established.

– The LED flashes green when a connec-

tion to the MINI Response Center has

been established.

The MINI Response Center then makes

contact with you and takes further steps

to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the

MINI Response Center can take further

steps to help you under certain circum-

stances.

For this purpose, data that serves to de-

termine the necessary rescue measures,

for instance the current position of the

vehicle when it can be determined, is

transmitted to the MINI Response Cen-

ter.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-

sponse Center through the loudspeakers,

the hands-free system, for instance, may

be broken. However, the MINI Response

Center may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the Emer-

gency Request.

Jump-starting

General information

If the battery is discharged, the engine can

be started using the battery of another vehi-

cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper

cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to

an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-

ries or danger to life. Do not touch any

components that are under voltage.

Seite 296

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

296

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning

If the jumper cables are connected in the

incorrect order, sparking may occur. There

is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor-

rect order during connection.

NOTICE

In the case of body contact between the

two vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur-

ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam-

age to property. Make sure that no body

contact occurs.

Preparation

1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The

voltage information can be found on the

battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting

vehicle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power

consumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

The starting aid terminal in the engine com-

partment acts as the battery's positive ter-

minal.

Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

A special connection on the body acts as the

battery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables

To prevent personal injury or damage to

both vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi-

nal.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi-

tive jumper cable to the positive termi-

nal of the battery, or to the correspond-

ing starting aid terminal of the vehicle

providing assistance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other

end of the cable to the positive terminal

of the battery, or to the corresponding

starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be

started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega-

tive jumper cable to the negative termi-

nal of the battery, or to the correspond-

ing engine or body ground of assisting

vehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the

negative terminal of the battery, or to

the corresponding engine or body

ground of the vehicle to be started.

Seite 297

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

297

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle

and let it run for several minutes at an

increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to

be started in the usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not suc-

cessful, wait a few minutes before mak-

ing another attempt in order to allow the

discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several mi-

nutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re-

verse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing

Safety information

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions

can malfunction during tow-starting/

towing with the Intelligent Safety systems

activated. There is a risk of accident.

Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off

prior to tow-starting/towing.

Steptronic transmission with

driven front axle: transporting the

vehicle

General information

The vehicle must not be towed if the front

wheels are touching the ground.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing

the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is

a risk of damage to property. Have vehicle

transported only with lifted front axle or

on a loading platform.

Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the

danger area, it can be pushed for a short

distance.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to

page 111.

Tow truck

Your vehicle should be transported with a

tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a

flat bed.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when

lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its

tow fitting, body parts, or suspension

parts.

Seite 298

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

298

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Steptronic transmission with ALL4:

transporting the vehicle

General information

The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the

danger area, it can be pushed for a short

distance.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to

page 111.

Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on a

loading platform.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when

lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its

tow fitting, body parts, or suspension

parts.

Manual transmission

Towing or pushing the vehicle

A broken-down vehicle can be towed or

pushed.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to

page 108.

NOTICE

If manual unlocking of the parking brake

is not possible, the vehicle cannot be

moved or towed. There is a risk of damage

to property. The vehicle should only be

transported on a loading platform.

Follow the following instructions:

– Make sure that the ignition is switched

on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights,

turn signals, and wipers may be unavail-

able.

– Do not tow the vehicle with the rear

axle tilted, as the front wheels could

turn.

– When the engine is stopped, there is no

power assist. Consequently, more force

needs to be applied when braking and

steering.

– Larger steering wheel movements are

required.

– The towing vehicle must not be lighter

than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,

it will not be possible to control the ve-

hicle's response.

– Do not exceed a towing speed of

30 mph/50 km/h.

– Do not exceed a towing distance of

30 miles/50 km.

Seite 299

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

299

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tow truck

With driven front axle

Your vehicle should be transported with a

tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a

flat bed.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when

lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its

tow fitting, body parts, or suspension

parts.

With ALL4

Have your vehicle transported on a flatbed

surface only

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing

the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There

is a risk of damage to property. The vehi-

cle should only be transported on a loading

platform.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when

lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its

tow fitting, body parts, or suspension

parts.

Towing other vehicles

General information

Switch on the hazard warning system, de-

pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly

identify the vehicle being towed by placing

a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-

dow.

Safety information

Warning

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the

towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle

to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or

it will not be possible to control the vehi-

cle's response. There is a risk of accident.

Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of

the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve-

hicle to be towed.

Seite 300

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

300

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in-

correctly, damage to other vehicle parts

can occur. There is a risk of damage to

property. Correctly attach the tow bar or

tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same

side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mount-

ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol-

low the following:

– Maneuvering capability is limited going

around corners.

– The tow bar will generate lateral forces

if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope

Observe the following notes when using the

tow rope:

– Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en-

able the vehicle to be towed without

jerking.

– Make sure the tow rope is not twisted

when fastening.

– Check the fastening of the tow fitting

and tow rope in regular intervals.

– Do not exceed a towing speed of

30 mph/50 km/h.

– Do not exceed a towing distance of

3 miles/5 km.

– When starting to tow the vehicle, make

sure that the tow rope is taut.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always be

carried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the

front or rear of the vehicle.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool

kit, refer to page 284, are together in the

cargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

– Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in.

– Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only.

– Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting,

for instance do not lift the vehicle by the

tow fitting.

– Check the fastening of the tow fitting in

regular intervals.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended,

there may be damage to the vehicle or to

the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage

to property. Follow the notes on using the

tow fitting.

Seite 301

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

301

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Screw thread for tow fitting

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo-

cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on

the right side with respect to the direction

of travel.

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover

to push it out.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible due

to the Steptronic transmission.

Have the reasons for the starting difficulties

corrected by a dealer’s service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair

shop.

Manual transmission

If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but

start the engine by jump-starting, refer to

page 296. If the vehicle is equipped with a

catalytic converter, only tow-start while the

engine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system

and comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 91.

3. Engage third gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the

clutch pedal pressed and slowly release

the pedal. After the engine starts, imme-

diately press on the clutch pedal again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the

tow bar or rope, and switch off the haz-

ard warning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's

service center or another qualified serv-

ice center or repair shop.

Seite 302

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

302

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Care

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Washing the vehicle

General information

Regularly remove foreign objects such as

leaves in the area below the windshield

when the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly

in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can

damage the vehicle.

Steam jets or high-pressure

washers

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure wash-

ers, components can be damaged due to

the pressure or temperatures being too

high. There is a risk of damage to property.

Maintain sufficient distance and do not

spray too long continuously. Follow the

operating instructions for the high-pres-

sure washer.

Distances and temperature

– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.

– Minimum distance from sensors, cam-

eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

– Minimum distance from glass sunroof:

31.5 in/80 cm.

Automatic vehicle washes

Safety information

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic washing sys-

tems or car washes can cause damage to

the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to

property. Follow the following instruc-

tions:

– Give preference to cloth car washes

or those that use soft brushes in or-

der to avoid paint damage.

– Do not drive through a car wash with

guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to

avoid damage to the chassis.

– Observe the tire width of the guide

rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.

– Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam-

age to the exterior mirrors.

– With rod antenna: unscrew the rod

antenna to avoid rod antenna break-

age.

– Deactivate the wiper and, if neces-

sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to

the wiper system.

Driving into a car wash with a manual

transmission

In car washes, the vehicle must be able to

roll freely.

Seite 303

Care MOBILITY

303

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to

page 108.

Driving into a car wash with a

Steptronic transmission

In car washes, the vehicle must be able to

roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to

page 111.

Some car washes do not permit persons in

the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked

from the outside when in selector lever po-

sition N. A signal is sounded when an at-

tempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a car wash

Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.

Start the engine, refer to page 92.

Headlights

Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not

use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in-

stance from insects, with shampoo and

wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an

ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes

briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac-

tion can be reduced. The heat generated

during braking dries brake discs and brake

pads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the win-

dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to

smearing and to reduce wiper noises and

wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General information

MINI recommends using vehicle care and

cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care

products are available from a dealer’s serv-

ice center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Cleansers can contain substances that are

dangerous and harmful to your health.

There is a risk of injury. When cleaning

the interior, open the doors or windows.

Only use products intended for cleaning

vehicles. Follow the instructions on the

container.

Vehicle paint

General information

Regular care contributes to driving safety

and value retention. Environmental influen-

ces in areas with elevated air pollution or

natural contaminants, such as tree resin or

pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork.

Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-

hicle care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel,

oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-

moved immediately to prevent the finish

from being altered or discolored.

Matte finish

Only use cleaning and care products suita-

ble for vehicles with matte finish.

Seite 304

MOBILITY Care

304

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Leather care

Remove dust from the leather regularly, us-

ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime

chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in-

creased wear and premature degradation of

the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from

clothing, clean leather and provide leather

care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently

because soiling on such surfaces is substan-

tially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt

and grease will gradually break down the

protective layer of the leather surface.

Upholstery material care

General information

Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a

vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with

beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro-

fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams us-

ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing

the material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of

clothing can damage the seat covers.

There is a risk of damage to property. En-

sure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral

wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to

9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or

steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the

manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning

agents can destroy the protective layer of

adjacent components, such as the brake

disc.

After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to

dry them. The heat generated during brak-

ing dries brake discs and brake pads and

protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean components such as the ra-

diator grille or door handles with plenty of

water, possibly with shampoo added, partic-

ularly when they have been exposed to road

salt.

Rubber components

Environmental influences can cause surface

soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.

Use only water and suitable cleaning agents

for cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-

ber care agents at regular intervals. When

cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-

con-containing vehicle care products in or-

der to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com-

ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry

with a soft cloth.

Seite 305

Care MOBILITY

305

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Plastic components

NOTICE

Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,

such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty

grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage

plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to

property. Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if

needed.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if

needed.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Safety belts

Warning

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety

belt webbing. Missing protective effect of

the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries

or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol-

ution for cleaning the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action

and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the

safety belts clipped into their buckles.

Safety belts should only be allowed to re-

tract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit

the pedal distance or block a depressed

pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-

jects in the vehicle such that they are se-

cured and cannot enter into the driver's

floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable

for the vehicle and can be safely attached

to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats

and do not layer several floor mats. Make

sure that there is sufficient clearance for

the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are

securely fastened again after they were re-

moved, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car's

interior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with

a microfiber cloth and water or a textile

cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,

rub back and forth in the direction of travel

only.

Sensor/camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a

cloth moistened with a small amount of

glass detergent.

Displays/Screens

NOTICE

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of

any kind can damage the surface of dis-

plays and screens. There is a risk of dam-

age to property. Clean with a clean, anti-

static microfiber cloth.

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damaged

with improper cleaning. There is a risk of

damage to property. Avoid pressure that is

too high and do not use any scratching

materials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber

cloth.

Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer

than three months, special measures must

Seite 306

MOBILITY Care

306

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

be taken. Further information is available

from a dealer's service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 307

Care MOBILITY

307

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Technical data

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

The technical data and specifications in the

Owner's Manual are used as guidance val-

ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate

from this, for instance due to the selected

special equipment, country version or coun-

try-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval docu-

ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-

tained from a dealer’s service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair

shop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the

model version, equipment or country-spe-

cific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into ac-

count attached parts, for instance a roof an-

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can

deviate, for instance due to the selected

special equipment, tires, load and chassis

version.

MINI Countryman

Width with mirrors in/mm 78.9/2,005

Width without mirrors in/mm 71.7/1,822

Height in/mm 61.3/1,557

Length in/mm 169.8/4,314

Wheelbase in/mm 105.1/2,670

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.4/11.4

Seite 308

REFERENCE Technical data

308

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Weights

MINI Cooper Countryman

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,376/1,985

Load

lbs/kg 851/386

Approved front axle load

lbs/kg 2,326/1,055

Approved rear axle load

lbs/kg 2,183/990

MINI Cooper S Countryman

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,542/2,060

Load lbs/kg 968/439

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,260/1,025

MINI Cooper Countryman ALL4

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,564/2,070

Load lbs/kg 862/391

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,293/1,040

MINI Cooper S Countryman ALL4

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,696/2,130

Load lbs/kg 902/409

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,469/1,120

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,337/1,060

MINI John Cooper Works Countryman ALL4

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,696/2,130

Load lbs/kg 871/395

Seite 309

Technical data REFERENCE

309

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

MINI John Cooper Works Countryman ALL4

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,502/1,135

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,337/1,060

Capacities

MINI Countryman

Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 16.1/61.0

Observe further information on fuel quality,

refer to page 250.

Seite 310

REFERENCE Technical data

310

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the

vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the edito-

rial deadline

The following chapters were updated in the

printed version of the Owner's Manual after

the editorial deadline for the Integrated

Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:

– Notes: notes: own safety: maintenance.

– Quick Reference Guide: on the road: re-

fueling stop: topping up the engine oil.

– Driving tips: observe when driving: driv-

ing on a race track.

– Mobility: engine oil: topping up the en-

gine oil.

– Mobility: coolant: coolant level.

– Mobility: preventive maintenance: MINI

maintenance system.

– Mobility: preventive maintenance: Con-

dition Based Service CBS.

– Mobility: preventive maintenance: Main-

tenance Manual and Service and War-

ranty Information Booklet for US models

and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet

for Canadian models.

Seite 311

Appendix REFERENCE

311

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

License Texts and Certifications

Headunit

Brazil

Este equipamento opera em caráter secun-

dário, isto é, não tem direito a proteção con-

tra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de esta-

ções do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar

interferência a sistemas operando em

caráter primário.

Europe

European Union: Declaration of

Conformity

Hereby, Alpine Electronics , Inc. declares

that the radio equipment type BIS01 is in

compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.

The full text of the EU declaration of con-

formity is avallable at the following internet

address: http://www.alpine.com/e/

research/

Technical information

Frequency Band: 2.5 GHz

Output Power : 8 dBm

Manufacturer and Address

Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics, Inc.

Address: 20-1, Yoshima Industrial Park,

Iwaki, Fukushima 970-1192 Japan

Phone: +81-246-36-4111

Български

С настоящото Alpine Electronics

декларира, че този тип

радиосъоръжение BIS01 е в

съответствие с Директива 2014/53/ЕС.

Цялостният текст на ЕС декларацията за

съответствие може да се намери на

следния интернет адрес: http://

www.alpine.com/e/research/

Čeština

Tímto Alpine Electronics prohlašuje, že typ

rádiového zařízení BIS01 je v souladu se

směrnicí 2014/53/EU. Úplné znění EU

prohlášení o shodě je k dispozici na této in-

ternetové adrese: http://www.alpine.com/e/

research/

Dansk

Hermed erklærer Alpine Electronics, at radi-

oudstyrstypen BIS01 er i overensstemmelse

med direktiv 2014/53/EU. EU-overensstem-

melseserklæringens fulde tekst kan findes

på følgende internetadresse: http://

www.alpine.com/e/research/

Deutsch

Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, dass der

Funkanlagentyp BIS01 der Richtlinie

2014/53/EU entspricht. Der vollständige

Seite 312

REFERENCE License Texts and Certifications

312

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Text der EU-Konformitätserklärung ist un-

ter der folgenden Internetadresse verfüg-

bar: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Eesti

Käesolevaga deklareerib Alpine Electronics,

et käesolev raadioseadme tüüp BIS01

vastab direktiivi 2014/53/EL nõuetele. ELi

vastavusdeklaratsiooni täielik tekst on kät-

tesaadav järgmisel internetiaadressil:

http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

English

Hereby, Alpine Electronics declares that the

radio equipment type BIS01 is in compli-

ance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full

text of the EU declararation of conformity is

avilable at the following internet ad-

dress :http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Español

Por la presente, Alpine Electronics declara

que el tipo de equipo radioeléctrico BIS01

es conforme con la Directiva 2014/53/UE.

El texto completo de la declaración UE de

conformidad está disponible en la dirección

Internet siguiente: http://

www.alpine.com/e/research/

Ελληνική

Με την παρούσα ο/η Alpine Electronics,

δηλώνει ότι ο ραδιοεξοπλισμός BIS01 πληροί

την οδηγία 2014/53/ΕΕ. Το πλήρες κείμενο

της δήλωσης συμμόρφωσης ΕΕ διατίθεται

στην ακόλουθη ιστοσελίδα στο διαδίκτυο:

http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Français

Le soussigné, Alpine Electronics, déclare

que l'équipement radioélectrique du type

BIS01 est conforme à la directive

2014/53/UE. Le texte complet de la déclara-

tion UE de conformité est disponible à

l'adresse internet suivante: http://

www.alpine.com/e/research/

Hrvatski

Alpine Electronics ovime izjavljuje da je

radijska oprema tipa BIS01 u skladu s Dir-

ektivom 2014/53/EU. Cjeloviti tekst EU iz-

jave o sukladnosti dostupan je na sljedećoj

internetskoj adresi: http://

www.alpine.com/e/research/

Íslenska

Hér, Alpine Electronics lýsir yfir að radíó-

búnaður gerð BIS01 er í samræmi við tilski-

pun 2014/53 / ESB. The fullur texti af ESB

declararation á samræmi er avilable á eftir-

farandi veffangi: http://www.alpine.com/e/

research/

Italiano

Il fabbricante, Alpine Electronics , dichiara

che il tipo di apparecchiatura radio BIS01 è

conforme alla direttiva 2014/53/UE. Il testo

completo della dichiarazione di conformità

UE è disponibile al seguente indirizzo Inter-

net: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Latviski

Ar šo Alpine Electronics deklarē, ka radioie-

kārta BIS01 atbilst Direktīvai 2014/53/ES.

Pilns ES atbilstības deklarācijas teksts ir

pieejams šādā interneta vietnē: http://

www.alpine.com/e/research/

Lietuvių

Aš, Alpine Electronics, patvirtinu, kad radijo

įrenginių tipas BIS01 atitinka Direktyvą

2014/53/ES. Visas ES atitikties deklaracijos

tekstas prieinamas šiuo interneto adresu:

http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Nederlands

Hierbij verklaar ik, Alpine Electronics, dat

het type radioapparatuur BIS01 conform is

Seite 313

License Texts and Certifications REFERENCE

313

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

met Richtlijn 2014/53/EU. De volledige

tekst van de EU-conformiteitsverklaring kan

worden geraadpleegd op het volgende inter-

netadres: http://www.alpine.com/e/

research/

Malti

B'dan, Alpine Electronics, niddikjara li dan

it-tip ta' tagħmir tar-radju BIS01 huwa kon-

formi mad-Direttiva 2014/53/UE. It-test

kollu tad-dikjarazzjoni ta' konformità tal-UE

huwa disponibbli f'dan l-indirizz tal-Internet

li ġej: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Magyar

Alpine Electronics igazolja, hogy a BIS01 tí-

pusú rádióberendezés megfelel a

2014/53/EU irányelvnek. Az EU-megfelelő-

ségi nyilatkozat teljes szövege elérhető a

következő internetes címen: http://

www.alpine.com/e/research/

Norsk

Erklærer herved Alpine Electronics at radio-

utstyr typen BIS01 er i samsvar med direk-

tiv 2014/53 / EU. Den fullstendige teksten i

EU declararation samsvars er avilable på

følgende internettadresse: http://

www.alpine.com/e/research/

Polski

Alpine Electronics niniejszym oświadcza, że

typ urządzenia radiowego BIS01 jest

zgodny z dyrektywą 2014/53/UE. Pełny

tekst deklaracji zgodności UE jest dostępny

pod następującym adresem internetowym:

http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Português

O(a) abaixo assinado(a) Alpine Electronics

declara que o presente tipo de equipamento

de rádio BIS01 está em conformidade com a

Diretiva 2014/53/UE. O texto integral da

declaração de conformidade está disponível

no seguinte endereço de Internet: http://

www.alpine.com/e/research/

Română

Prin prezenta, Alpine Electronics declară că

tipul de echipamente radio BIS01 este în

conformitate cu Directiva 2014/53/UE.

Textul integral al declarației UE de confor-

mitate este disponibil la următoarea adresă

internet: http://www.alpine.com/e/

research/

Slovensko

Alpine Electronics potrjuje, da je tip radi-

jske opreme BIS01 skladen z Direktivo

2014/53/EU. Celotno besedilo izjave EU o

skladnosti je na voljo na naslednjem splet-

nem naslovu: http://www.alpine.com/e/

research/

Slovenský

Alpine Electronics týmto vyhlasuje, že rádi-

ové zariadenie typu BIS01 je v súlade so

smernicou 2014/53/EÚ. Úplné EÚ vyhláse-

nie o zhode je k dispozícii na tejto interne-

tovej adrese: http://www.alpine.com/e/

research/

Suomi

Alpine Electronics vakuuttaa, että radiolai-

tetyyppi BIS01 on direktiivin 2014/53/EU

mukainen. EU-vaatimustenmukaisuusva-

kuutuksen täysimittainen teksti on saata-

villa seuraavassa internetosoitteessa:

http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Svenska

Härmed försäkrar Alpine Electronics att

denna typ av radioutrustning BIS01 över-

ensstämmer med direktiv 2014/53/EU. Den

fullständiga texten till EU-försäkran om

överensstämmelse finns på följande webba-

dress: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Seite 314

REFERENCE License Texts and Certifications

314

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Japan

Mexico

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo

no cause interferencia perjudicial y

(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar

cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que

pueda causar su operación no deseada.

Russia, Belarus, Kazakhstan

Диапазон частот: 2.5 ГГц

Излучаемая мощность: 8 дБм

South Korea

해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으

므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수

없습니다

A 급 기기 (업무용 방송통신기자재)

이 기기는 업무용(A 급) 전자파적합기기

로서 판매자

또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라

며, 가정외의

지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니

다.

Taiwan

本產品符合低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦

法第十二條、第十四條等條文規定

經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經

許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變

更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及

功能。

Low Power radio frequency electric machi-

nery was qualified by Type Approval, not

get permission from authority; the company,

business or user can’t arbitrarily change

frequency, increase power or modify feature

or function of original design.

低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全

及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，

應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續

使用。

前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無

線電通信。

Seite 315

License Texts and Certifications REFERENCE

315

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、

科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干

擾。

Use of low power radio frequency electric

machinery can’t affect flight safety and in-

terfere with legal communication; once dis-

cover the interfered phenomenon, it should

stop immediately and improve to no inter-

ference and then could continue to use.

The preceding legal communication is radio

communication which follows Telecommu-

nication Act to operate.

Low power radio frequency electric machi-

nery must tolerate interference from legal

communication or electric machinery appa-

ratus of industry, science and medical radia-

tion.

USA, Canada

USA (FCC) and Canada (IC)

Product code: RB00010A

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment. This transmitter must

not be co-located or operated in conjunction

with any other antenna or transmitter. This

device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules

and Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme à la partie

15 des règles de la FCC et aux normes des

CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux ap-

pareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploita-

tion est autorisée aux deux conditions sui-

vantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et (2) l'appareil doit accepter tout

brouillage subi, même si le brouillage est

susceptible d'en compromettre le fonc-

tionnement.

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radi-

ation exposure limits set forth for an uncon-

trolled environment and meets the FCC

radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines

and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)

Exposure rules. This equipment has very

low levels of RF energy that is deemed to

comply without maximum permissive expo-

sure evaluation (MPE). (產)

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées

pour un environnement non contrôlé et re-

specte les règles les radioélectriques (RF)

de la FCC lignes directrices d'exposition et

d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectri-

ques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement

émet une énergie RF très faible qui est con-

sidérée comme conforme sans évaluation de

l’exposition maximale autorisée (MPE). (產)

Zambia

Information regarding Open

Source Software Licenses

The “IwIP – A Lightweight TCP/IP stack”

included in some products is licensed under

the “BSD licence”. A copy of that license in

the English original version with a copy-

Seite 316

REFERENCE License Texts and Certifications

316

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

right notice, a disclaimer of warranty, and

an exclusion of liability is included below.

Redistribution and use in source and binary

forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following condi-

tions are met: 1. Redistributions of source

code must retain the above copyright no-

tice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form

must reproduce the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following dis-

claimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution. 3.

The name of the author may not be used to

endorse or promote products derived from

this software without specific prior written

permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PRO-

VIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS`` AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, IN-

CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IM-

PLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTA-

BILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDEN-

TAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-

QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS

OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND

ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABIL-

ITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,

EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY

OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Remote Control

Mexico

COFETEL: RLVBHEID13–0912

IFETEL: RLVBHEID18-1287

Marca: Hella

Modelo (s): IDGNG1

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo

no cause interferencia perjudicial y

(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar

cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que

pueda causar su operación no deseada.

USA/Canada

FCC ID:NBGIDGNG1

FCC ID NBG-IDNGN1M

FCC § 15.19 Labelling requirements

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada li-

cence-exempt RSS. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC § 15.21 Information to user

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

Seite 317

License Texts and Certifications REFERENCE

317

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

ance could void the user's authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

IC: 2694A-IDGNG1

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils

radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est

autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:

(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et

(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même

si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement.

FCC § 15.19 Labelling requirements

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada li-

cence-exempt RSS. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC § 15.21 Information to user

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user's authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem

Canada

IC: 7812D-TIS07

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

USA

FCC ID: KR5TIS-07

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Transmitter/Receiver

Mexico

IFETEL: RLVCOA213-1447

A2C35029700

Continental Automotive GmbH

Siemensstrasse 12

93055 Regensburg

Germany

Para su uso en México, la operación de este

equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos con-

diciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo

no cause interferencia perjudicial y

(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar

cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que

pueda causar su operación no deseada.

Canada/USA

Model: A2C35029700

IC: 7812D-35029700

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

Seite 318

REFERENCE License Texts and Certifications

318

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

(1) this device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils

radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est

autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :

(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et

(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même

si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement.

Model: A2C35029700

FCC ID:KR5A2C35029700

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Seite 319

License Texts and Certifications REFERENCE

319

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Everything from A to Z

Index

ABS Antilock Braking System 158

Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Con-

trol 115

Accessories and parts 10

ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 163

Activated-charcoal filter 190

Activation times, parked-car ventila-

tion 191

Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based

cruise control 163

Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 149

Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis-

play 156

Adaptive chassis 160

Additives, engine oil types 278

Adjusting menu contents, Central Informa-

tion Display (CID) 40

Adjustments, steering wheel 84

Airbags 138

Airbags, indicator and warning light 140

Air circulation, see Recirculated-air

mode 185, 189

Air conditioner 184

Air conditioning, climate 185, 188

Air distribution, manual 185, 190

Air drying, see Air conditioning 185, 188

Air flow, air conditioner 185

Air flow, automatic climate control 189

Air pressure, tires 252

Air vents, see Ventilation 190

Alarm system 67

Alarm triggering 67

Alarm, unintentional 68

ALL4 160

All-season tires, see Winter tires 261

All-wheel drive, see ALL4 160

AM/FM station 228

Antifreeze, washer fluid 106

Antilock Braking System ABS 158

Anti-slip control, see DSC 158

Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 269

Approach control warning with city light

braking function 150

Approved axle load 309

Ash tray 198

Assistance when driving off 161

Assistance with breakdown 294

Audio 236

Audio playback, Bluetooth 236

Audio playback, pause 224

AUTO intensity 189

Automatic climate control 187

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir-

ror 83

Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-

ger airbags 140

Automatic headlight control 133

Automatic locking 66

Automatic recirculated-air control 189

Automatic Service Request 244

Automatic transmission with Step-

tronic 108

Automatic unlocking 66

Automatic vehicle wash 303

AUTO program, automatic climate con-

trol 188

AUTO program, intensity 189

Auto Start/Stop function 94

Auto washing 303

Average consumption 127

Average speed 127

Axle loads, weights 309

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar sup-

port 74, 75

Backrest, seats 73

Seite 320

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

320

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Balance, sound settings 226

Band-aids, see First-aid kit 294

Bass, sound settings 226

Battery, disposing of 293

Battery Guard, Teleservice 245

Battery, vehicle 291

Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-

ing 298

Belts, safety belts 77

Beverage holder, cup holder 202

Blocking, power window 70

Bluetooth audio 236

Bluetooth connection 46

Bonus range, GREEN Mode 220

Bottle holder, see Cup holder 202

Brake assistant 158

Brake discs, break-in 212

Brake force display 156

Brake lights, brake force display 156

Brake pads, break-in 212

Braking, information 214

Breakdown assistance 294

Breakdown, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 146

Breaking in 212

Brightness of Control Display 43

Bulb replacement 285

Bulb replacement, front 286, 288

Bulb replacement, rear 290

Bulb replacement, side 291

Bulbs and lights 285

Button, SOS 295

Button, Start/Stop 91

Bypassing, see Jump-starting 296

California Proposition 65 Warning 10

Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel-

ligent Safety 149

Camera-based cruise control 163

Camera lenses, care 306

Camera, rearview camera 176

Can holder, see Cup holder 202

Care, displays 306

Care, light-alloy wheels 305

Care, vehicle 304

Care, washing the vehicle 303

Cargo area 204

Cargo area, adapting size 208

Cargo area, enlarging 206

Cargo area lid 61

Cargo area, loading 204

Cargo area, seating surface 210

Cargo area, storage compartments 206

Cargo cover 205

Cargo position, rear seat backrest 206

Cargo, stowing and securing 204

Cargo straps 205

Carpet, care 306

Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas

system 213

CBS Condition Based Service 282

Center armrest 202

Center console 34

Central Information Display (CID) 36

Central Information Display (CID), see Con-

trol Display 37

Central instrument cluster, LED ring 130

Central locking system, unlocking, from in-

side 57

Central screen, see Control Display 37

Changes, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 9

Changing parts 284

Changing wheels 267

Changing, wheels and tires 260

Chassis number, see Vehicle identification

number 15

Check Control 117

Checking the oil level electronically 276

Check oil level 276

Children, seating position 85

Children, transporting safely 85

Child restraint system 85

Child restraint system LATCH 88

Child restraint systems, mounting 86

Child safety locks 90

Child seat, mounting 86

Child seats 85

Chrome parts, care 305

Cigarette lighter 198

Cleaning, displays 306

Seite 321

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

321

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Clearance, water 214

Climate control 184, 187

Clothes hooks 203

Coasting 221

Coasting with engine decoupled, coast-

ing 221

Coasting with idling engine 221

Combination switch, see Turn signals 98

Combi switch, see Wiper system 99, 103

Comfort Access 58

Communication 240

Compartments in the doors 202

Compass 196

Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-

ces 46

Compressor 262

Computer, see Onboard Computer 126

Condensation on windows 190

Condensation under the vehicle 215

Condition Based Service CBS 282

Conference, see Calls with multiple par-

ties 241

Configuring driving program 161

Confirmation signal 67

Connecting device 45

Connecting electrical devices, see Sock-

ets 198

Connections 45

Consumption, see Average consump-

tion 127

Consumption, see Current consump-

tion 123

Contacts 242

Continued driving with a flat tire 145, 148

Control Display 37

Controller 38

Control systems, driving stability 158

Convenient closing 54

Convenient opening 53

Cooling, maximum 188

Cornering light 134

Corrosion on brake discs 215

Cosmetic mirror 198

Coupling, see Pairing 45

Courtesy lights during unlocking 53

Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 54

Cruise control 170

Cruise control, active 163

Cruise control with distance control, see

Camera-based cruise control 163

Cruise control without distance control, see

Cruise control 170

Cruising range 122

Cup holder 202

Current consumption 123

Customer support 246

Damage, tires 259

Data memory 11

Data protection, settings 45

Data, technical 308

Date 42

Date, display 122

Daytime pedestrian collision mitiga-

tion 153

Daytime running lights 134

DCC, see Cruise control 170

Defrosting, see Defrosting the win-

dows 186

Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 190

Defrosting the windows 186

Deleting personal data 45

Deletion of personal data 45

Device list 45

Digital clock 122

Digital compass 196

Digital radio, see HD Radio reception 229

Dimensions 308

Dimmable exterior mirrors 83

Dimmable interior mirror 84

Direction indicator, see Turn signals 98

Display, date 122

Display, electronic, instrument cluster 117

Display, engine temperature 128

Display, GREEN Mode 218

Display, iDrive 36

Display lighting, see Instrument light-

ing 136

Displays 116

Displays, care 306

Seite 322

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

322

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Disposal, coolant 281

Disposal, vehicle battery 293

Distance control, see PDC 172

Drive-off assistant 161

Drive-off assistant, see DSC 158

Driver assistance, see Intelligent

Safety 149

Driver profiles 65

Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-

ing Modes switch 160

Driving Excitement, SPORT 129

Driving instructions, breaking in 212

Driving mode, GREEN 218

Driving modes 160

Driving notes, general 213

Driving notes, things to remember when

driving 212

Driving on poor roads 216

Driving on racetracks 216

Driving stability control systems 158

Driving through water 214

Driving tip, GREEN tip 220

Driving tips 213

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 158

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 159

Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chas-

sis 160

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 158

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 159

Easy Opener 60

Electronic displays, instrument cluster 117

Electronic oil measurement 276

Electronic Stability Program ESP, see

DSC 158

Emergency Request 295

Emergency service, see MINI Roadside As-

sistance 294

Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 249

Emergency unlocking, transmission

lock 114

Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see

Emergency wheel 271

Energy control 123

Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 94

Engine, automatic switch-off 94

Engine compartment 273

Engine compartment, working in 274

Engine coolant 280

Engine idling when driving, coasting 221

Engine oil 276

Engine oil, adding 277

Engine oil change 279

Engine oil filler neck 277

Engine oil types to add 278

Engine start, see Jump-starting 296

Engine start, see Starting the engine 92

Engine stop 93

Engine temperature, display 128

Entering a vehicle wash 303

Entertainment, control elements 224

Entertainment source, changing 224

Equipment, interior 193

Error displays, see Check Control 117

ESP Electronic Stability Program, see

DSC 158

Exchanging, wheels and tires 260

Exhaust gas system 213

Exiting a vehicle wash 303

Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Moni-

tor 83

Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 83

Exterior mirrors 82

Exterior mirrors, malfunction 83

External start 296

External temperature display 122

External temperature warning 122

Eyes for securing cargo 205

Fader, sound settings 226

Failure message, see Check Control 117

False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 68

Fan, see Air flow 185, 189

Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 77

Filler neck for engine oil 277

Filter, see Microfilter 186

Seite 323

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

323

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal fil-

ter 190

Fine wood, care 305

First-aid kit 294

Flat tire, changing wheels 267

Flat Tire Monitor TPM 146

Flat tire, repairing 262

Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142

Flat tire, warning light 143, 147

Flooding, driving through 214

Floor carpet, care 306

Floor mats, care 306

FM/AM station 228

Fogged up windows 186

Fold-away position, windshield wip-

ers 102, 105

Foot brake 214

For Your Own Safety 9

Front airbags 138

Front fog lights 135

Front fog lights, LED, bulb replace-

ment 289

Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-

activation 140

Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator

light 141

Front seats 73

Fuel 250

Fuel cap 248

Fuel filler flap 248

Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 249

Fuel gauge 121

Fuel quality 250

Fuel recommendation 250

Fuel, tank capacity 310

Fuse 293

Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-

sal Remote Control 193

Gasoline 250

Gear shift indicator 124

General driving notes 213

General settings 42

Glare shield 198

Glass sunroof, initialize the system 72

Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-

roof 71

Glove compartment 201

Gong, volume equalization 226

GPS geolocation, vehicle position 43

GREEN bonus range 220

GREEN Mode 218

GREEN - program, driving dynamics 160

GREEN tip, driving tip 220

Gross vehicle weight, approved 309

Ground clearance 215

Halogen headlights 286

Handbrake, see Parking brake 96

Hand-held transmitter, alternating

code 194

Hands-free system 242

Hazard warning flashers 294

HD Radio 229

Head airbag 139

Headlight control, automatic 133

Headlight flasher 99

Headlight glass 286

Headlights, care 304

Head restraints and seats 73

Head restraints, front 79

Head restraints, rear 80

Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 204

High-beam Assistant 134

High beams 99

High beams/low beams, see High-beam As-

sistant 134

Hills 214

Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis-

tant 161

Holder for beverages 202

HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote

Control 193

Homepage, see Internet 8

Hood 274

Horn 32

Hot exhaust gas system 213

Hotline, see Customer support 246

Seite 324

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

324

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Hydroplaning 213

Ice warning, see External temperature

warning 122

Icy roads, see External temperature warn-

ing 122

Identification marks, tires 257

Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-

cation number 15

Ignition off 91

Ignition on 91

Illuminated ring, central instrument clus-

ter 130

Indication of a flat tire 143, 147

Indicator and warning lights, see Check

Control 117

Indicator light, see Check Control 117

Individual air distribution 185, 190

Individual settings, see Driver profiles 65

Inflation pressure, tires 252

Inflation pressure warning, tires 146

Info Display 117

Information 8

Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142

Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 147

Input, iDrive 36

Instrument cluster 116

Instrument cluster, electronic displays 117

Instrument lighting 136

Integrated key 56

Integrated Universal Remote Control 193

Intelligent emergency call 295

Intelligent Safety 149

Intended use 9

Intensity, AUTO program 189

Interior equipment 193

Interior lights 136

Interior lights during unlocking 53

Interior lights with the vehicle locked 54

Interior mirror 82

Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 84

Interior mirror, compass 196

Interior mirror, manually dimmable 83

Interior motion sensor 68

Internet site 8

Interval display, service notifications 123

Interval mode 100, 103

In the vicinity of the center console 34

In the vicinity of the roofliner 35

In the vicinity of the steering wheel 32

iPod/iPhone 236

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 269

Jam protection system, glass sunroof 72

Jam protection system, windows 69

Jump-starting 296

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 58

Key, see Integrated key 56

Key, see Vehicle key 52

Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 111

Knee airbag 139

Label on recommended tires 260

Label, runflat tires 261

Language, set on Control Display 42

Lashing eyes 205

LATCH child restraint fixing system 88

Launch Control 115

Leather care 305

LED ring, central instrument cluster 130

LEDs, light-emitting diodes 285

Letters and numbers, entering 36

Light 132

Light-alloy wheels, care 305

Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 285

Lighter 198

Lighting 132

Light replacement 285

Light replacement, front 286, 288

Light replacement, rear 290

Light replacement, side 291

Seite 325

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

325

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Lights and bulbs 285

Light switch 132

List of all messages 44

Load 205

Loading 204

Loading position 206

Location, vehicle position 43

Locking, automatic 66

Locking, from inside 57

Locking, see Opening and Closing 52

Locking, settings 66

Low beams 132

Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-

sistant 134

Lower back support 75

Lower back support, mechanical 74

Lug bolt lock 269

Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage

rack 215

Lumbar support 75

Lumbar support, mechanical 74

Maintenance 282

Maintenance requirements 282

Maintenance, service notifications 123

Maintenance system, MINI 282

Make-up mirror 198

Malfunction displays, see Check Con-

trol 117

Manual air flow 185

Manual brake, see Parking brake 96

Manual control, air distribution 185, 190

Manual control, air flow 189

Manual mode, transmission 112

Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 173

Manual operation, rearview camera 176

Manual transmission 107

Manufacturer of the MINI 9

Matt paint, care 304

Maximum cooling 188

Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit

Info 125

Maximum speed, winter tires 261

Measuring units 43

Mechanical key 56

Media of the Owner's Manual 51

Medical kit 294

Memory function 81

Menu in instrument cluster 126

Menus, Central Information Display

(CID) 39

Messages 44

Messages, see Check Control 117

Microfilter 186, 190

Microphone, muting 241

MID - program, driving dynamics 160

MINI driving modes 160

MINI logo projection during unlocking 53

MINI maintenance system 282

Minimum tread, tires 259

MINI Picnic Bench 210

MINI Roadside Assistance 294

MINI Teleservices 244

Mirrors 82

Mobile communication devices in the vehi-

cle 213

Mobile phone 240

Mobile phone, connecting 45

Mobile phone, operation 240

Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 294

Mobility System 262

Modifications, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 9

Moisture in headlight 286

Monitor, see Control Display 37

Mounting of child restraint systems 86

MP3 player, see Audio 236

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints

front 79

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints

rear 80

Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy rims 305

New wheels and tires 260

No-touch closing of the tailgate 60

Seite 326

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

326

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

No-touch opening of the tailgate 60

OBD Onboard Diagnosis 283

Obstacle marking, rearview camera 177

Octane rating, see Recommended fuel

grade 251

Odometer 121

Oil 276

Oil, adding 277

Oil change 279

Oil filler neck 277

Oil service interval, service notifica-

tions 123

Oil types to add, engine 278

Onboard Computer 126

Onboard Diagnosis OBD 283

Onboard literature, printed 51

Onboard vehicle tool kit 284

On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 294

Opening and Closing 52

Opening, from inside 57

Operating concept Central Information Dis-

play (CID) operating concept 36

Operating menus, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 36

Operation via the Controller 39

Optional equipment 9

Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air

control 189

Owner's Manual, printed 51

Paint, car care 304

Panic alarm, see Panic mode 68

Panic mode 68

Panoramic glass sunroof 71

Parallel parking assistant 178

Park Distance Control PDC 172

Parked-car ventilation 191

Parked vehicle, condensation 215

Parking aid, see PDC 172

Parking assistant 178

Parking brake 96

Parking lights 132

Parts and accessories 10

Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 83

Pathway lighting 133

Pathway lines, rearview camera 177

Pause, audio playback 224

PDC Park Distance Control 172

Performance Control 160

Personal profile, see Driver profiles 65

Phone conference, see Calls with multiple

parties 241

Phone, connecting 45

Picnic Bench 210

Plastic, care 306

Poor roads, driving on 216

PostCrash - iBrake 157

Power failure 292

Power windows 69

Pressure, tires 252

Pressure warning, tires 146

Printed onboard literature 51

Profiles, see Driver profiles 65

Programmable memory buttons, Central In-

formation Display (CID) 41

Protective function, glass sunroof 72

Protective function, windows 69

Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 38

Racetrack operation 216

Radio 228

Radio, adjusting the volume 224

Radio, control elements 224

Radio Data System RDS 228

Radio, muting 224

Radio-ready state 92

Radio, tone settings 226

Rain sensor 100, 103

Ratchet straps 205

RDS Radio Data System 228

Rear lights 290

Rear seat backrests, folding down 206

Seite 327

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

327

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Rear seats 76

Rearview camera 175

Rear-view mirrors, exterior 82

Rear window defroster 186, 190

Rear window wiper, operation 101, 105

Recirculated-air filter 190

Recirculated-air mode 185, 189

Recommended fuel grade 251

Recommended tire brands 260

Refueling 248

Remaining range 122

Remote control, universal 193

Replacing parts 284

Replacing the battery, vehicle key 55

Replacing, wheels and tires 260

Reporting safety malfunctions 15

RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise con-

trol 163

RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 170

Reserve warning, see Range 122

Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142

Retreaded tires 261

Roadside parking lights 133

Rolling code hand-held transmitter 194

RON recommended fuel grade 251

Roofliner 35

Roof-mounted luggage rack 215

RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat

tires 261

Rubber components, care 305

Runflat tires 261

Safe braking 214

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and

front passenger seat 79

Safety belts 77

Safety belts, care 306

Safety locks, doors, and windows 90

Safety switch, windows 70

Safety systems, airbags 138

Satellite radio 230

Saving fuel 217

Screens, care 306

Screen, see Control Display 37

Screwdriver 284

Sealant, see Mobility System 262

Seat heating, front 76

Seating position for children 85

Seats and head restraints 73

Seats, front 73

Seats, rear 76

Securing cargo 204

Selection list in instrument cluster 126

Sensors, care 306

Service and warranty 11

Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 294

Service notifications, display 123

Service Request 245

Service requirements, Condition Based

Service CBS 282

Servotronic 162

SET button, camera-based cruise con-

trol 163

SET button, Cruise Control 170

Settings, general 42

Settings, locking/unlocking 66

Settings, mirrors 82

Settings, seats and head restraints 73

Shift paddles on the steering wheel 113

Side airbag 138

Signaling, horn 32

Signals when unlocking 67

Sitting safely 73

Sizes, see Dimensions 308

Slide/tilt glass roof 71

Smartphone, connecting 45

Smartphone, operation 240

Snow chains 266

Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 283

Sockets, electrical devices 198

SOS button 295

Sound output 224

Source, changing, see Entertainment

source, changing 224

Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 271

Speed, average 127

Speed limit display, see Speed Limit

Info 125

Speed Limit Info 125

Seite 328

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

328

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 128

Speed Volume, volume equalization 226

Speed warning 129

Sport displays 129

SPORT program, driving dynamics 161

Sport program, transmission 112

Stability control systems 158

Standard equipment 9

Start/stop, automatic function 94

Start/Stop button 91

Starting the engine 92

Station, AM/FM 228

Station, renaming 229

Stations, stored 235

Station, storing 228

Status information, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 37

Status of Owner's Manual 9

Status, vehicle 131

Steering assistance 162

Steering column adjustment 84

Steering wheel, adjusting 84

Steptronic Sport transmission, see Step-

tronic transmission 108

Steptronic Sport transmission with double

clutch, see Steptronic transmission 108

Steptronic transmission 108

Steptronic transmission with double clutch,

see Steptronic transmission 108

Stopping the engine 93

Storage compartments 201

Storage, tires 261

Store Mirror position, see Memory func-

tion 81

Store seat position, see Memory func-

tion 81

Storing the vehicle 306

Stowing and securing cargo 204

Suitable devices 46

Suitable mobile phones 46

Summer tires, tread 259

Sun visor 198

Supplementary Owner's Manuals 51

Supplementary text message 121

Switch for driving dynamics 160

Switching calls, see Calls with multiple par-

ties 241

Switch, see Cockpit 32

Symbols 8

Tachometer 121

Tailgate 61

Tailgate, closing with no-touch activa-

tion 60

Tailgate, opening with no-touch activa-

tion 60

Tailgate via vehicle key 54

Tail lights 290

Technical changes, see For Your Own

Safety 9

Technical data 308

Telephone 240

Telephone conference, see Calls with multi-

ple parties 241

Telephone, operation 240

Teleservice Battery Guard 245

Teleservice Report 245

Teleservices 244

Temperature, air conditioner 184

Temperature, automatic climate con-

trol 187

Temperature display for external tempera-

ture 122

Temperature, engine 128

Terminal, starting aid 297

Text message, see Check Control mes-

sages 121

Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 67

Thigh support 76

Tilt alarm sensor 68

Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 83

Time 42

Tire damage 259

Tire identification marks 257

Tire inflation pressure 252

Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see

TPM 146

Tire pressure 252

Seite 329

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

329

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142

Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 262

Tires 252

Tires, changing 260

Tire sealant, see Mobility System 262

Tires, runflat 261

Tire tread 259

Tone 226

Tools 284

Total vehicle weight 309

Towing 298

Tow-starting 298

TPM Flat Tire Monitor 146

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 142

Traction control 159

TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control,

DTC 159

Transmission lock, electronic unlock-

ing 114

Transmission lock, releasing manually 114

Transmission, manual transmission 107

Transmission, see Steptronic transmis-

sion 108

Transporting children safely 85

Tread, tires 259

Treble, sound settings 226

Trip computer 128

Triple turn signal activation 98

Trip odometer 121

Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 121

Trunk, see Cargo area 204

Turning radius lines, rearview camera 177

Turn signal, front 286, 288

Turn signal, indicator light 120

Turn signal, side 291

Turn signals, operation 98

Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 290

Unintentional alarm 68

Units, see Measuring units 43

Universal remote control 193

Unlocking, automatic 66

Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 52

Unlocking, settings 66

Updates made after the editorial deadline 9

Upholstery care 305

USB connection 48

USB port, position in vehicle 199

USB storage device 236

Used battery, disposing of 293

Use, intended 9

Vanity mirror 198

Vehicle battery 291

Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-

tance 294

Vehicle, breaking in 212

Vehicle care 304

Vehicle care products 304

Vehicle features and options 9

Vehicle identification number 15

Vehicle jack 269

Vehicle key, additional 55

Vehicle key, loss 55

Vehicle key, malfunction 55

Vehicle key, opening/closing 52

Vehicle key, replacing the battery 55

Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 52

Vehicle paint, care 304

Vehicle position, vehicle location 43

Vehicle status 131

Vehicle storage 306

Vehicle wash 303

Vehicle wash, automatic 303

Vehicle, washing 303

Ventilation 190

Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 191

VIN, see Vehicle identification number 15

Voice command response, smartphone 243

Volume equalization 226

Warning and indicator lights, see Check

Control 117

Warning displays, see Check Control 117

Warning messages, see Check Control 117

Seite 330

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

330

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning triangle 294

Warranty 9

Washer fluid 106

Washer nozzles, windshield 101, 105

Washing the vehicle 303

Water on roads 214

Weights 309

Welcome lights 133

Welcome lights during unlocking 53

Wheel base, vehicle 308

Wheels 252

Wheels, changing 260

Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142

Windows, powered 69

Windshield cleaning system 99, 103

Windshield defroster 186, 190

Windshield washer fluid 106

Windshield washer nozzles 101, 105

Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-

tion 102, 105

Windshield wipers, see Wiper sys-

tem 99, 103

Winter storage, care 306

Winter tires, suitable tires 261

Winter tires, tread 259

Wiper blades, replacing 284

Wiper fluid 106

Wiper system 99, 103

Wood, care 305

Word match concept, navigation 36

Wrench 284

Your dealer's service center 245

Seite 331

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

331

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

01405A02C73 ue

*BL5A02C7300P*

California Proposition 65

Warning

For vehicles sold in California:

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.

Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

01405A02C73 ue

*BL5A02C7300P*

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

MINI 2021 Cooper Countryman ALL4 Classic Trim Cooper Countryman ALL4 Classic Trim 2021

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

MINI Cooper Countryman ALL4 Classic Trim 2021 Questions and Answers

Related Products

MINI Cooper S Countryman ALL4 Classic Trim 2021 Cars

MINI 2021 John Cooper Works Countryman ALL4 Classic Trim John Cooper Works Countryman ALL4 2021 Classic Trim

Sunny Health & Fitness SF-S023812 Smart Fitness Compact Mini Stepper

Electactic LY2010 Compact Mini Fridge Portable Small Refrigerator

MechMaxx MEC17 Mini Compact Excavator Kubota D902 Engine, 89” Digging Depth, 4145 LBS Weight

SilverStone SST-ML12B MILO 12 Slim & compact Mini-ITX enclosure